Quarterlytics / Energy / Oil & Gas Exploration & Production / Prime Media Group Limited

Prime Media Group Limited

prt · ASX Energy
Claim this profile
Ticker prt
Exchange ASX
Sector Energy
Industry Oil & Gas Exploration & Production
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2011 Annual Report · Prime Media Group Limited
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
2 0 1 1   A n n uAl   R e p oR

t

CONTENTS

  2  ChairmaN ’S a ddrESS

  4  ChiEf EXECUTiVE OffiCEr’S rEPOrT

  9  dirECTOrS’ rEPOrT

 25  COrPO raTE GOVErNaNCE ST aTEmENT 

 30  fiNaNC iaL STaTEmENTS 

Prime Media Group is an Australian 
company committed to bringing the very 
best in entertainment and information to 
the people of regional Australia.

R ADIO

TELEVISION

CAIRNS
TOWNSVILLE

MACKAY

ROCKHAMPTON
GLADSTONE

SUNSHINE COAST

WA

NSW

VIC

ACT

TOTAL POTENTIAL AUDIENCE

TOTAL POTENTIAL AUDIENCE

1,200,000

5,115,000

AGE DEMOGRAPHIC BREAKDOWN

AGE DEMOGRAPHIC BREAKDOWN

<14  20.5%
  15 – 24   13.6%
  25 – 39  20.6%
  40 – 54  21.4%
> 55  23.9%

<17  23.3%

  18 - 24   9.1%
  25 - 39  18.6%
  40 - 54  20.7%
> 55  28.3%

 
 
 
 
HIGHLIGHTS

$257m

RE VENUE*

$49.1m

EBIT*

$27.2m

NET PROFIT AF TER TA X*

4.5¢

FULL YE AR   
DIVIDEND/SHARE

 53.4%

CHANGE IN NET   
PROFIT AF TER TA X*

 7.7%

ADVERTISING RE VENUE

228

213 208 211

191

18.5 18.3 18.6

19.7

9.2

  07 

08 

09 

10 

11 

  07 

08 

09 

10 

11 

ADVERTISING RE VENUE 
TELE VISION (Millions)

ADVERTISING RE VENUE   
R ADIO (Millions)

* 

 f rom C ontinuing o per ation s before Sig nific ant Item s.

Prime media GrouP ANNUAL REPORT 2011

1

2

ChairmaN’S 
addrESS

On behalf of the Directors of Prime 
Media Group Limited, I am pleased 
to present the Annual Report 
covering the 2011 financial year.

We’re very pleased with the performance of our 
partnership with the Seven network. Its ability to 
consistently deliver Australia’s favourite programs provides 
for strong audience delivery for advertisers, and over 
the course of the financial year pRIMe7 experienced 
significant audience growth in all of its viewing regions.

I am very pleased about the improvements made to our 
company. the Board and Management continue to work 
to optimise returns for shareholders by exploring every 
opportunity to extract more opportunity from existing 
assets. i’d especially like to thank Prime’s dedicated staff 
for their continuing efforts and contribution.

A net profit after tax result of $27.2 million has delivered 
an $81.6 million turnaround. earnings per share (from 
continuing operations before significant items) increased 
by 51% to 7.4 cents per share. A final dividend per share 
of 2.4 cents is a 71% improvement on the prior year. the 
Directors increased the dividend pay-out ratio from 50% to 
75% effective from the final dividend payment for the 2011 
financial year.

Clearly prime is back on the right track. I do hope you’re 
as pleased with this year’s result as I am.

Paul ramsay aO 
ChairmaN

It has been a year of renewal and strong profit growth 
for prime Media Group limited. With a new Ceo at the 
helm, the Board has moved quickly and purposefully to 
reposition the business to focus on its core competency of 
regional broadcasting. 

We have also acted to strengthen financial and corporate 
governance with the appointment of lesley Kennedy 
as Chief Financial officer and Company Secretary from 
December 2010. lesley has an excellent pedigree as 
CFo and Company Secretary and spent many years as a 
chartered accountant and auditor with ernst & Young. 
I welcome lesley to prime and look forward to her 
continuing contribution to the group.

our renewed focus on regional broadcasting, along 
with the completion of the non-core asset disposal 
program, has delivered a tremendous turn around in the 
performance of the business with a 53% lift in net profit 
after tax, demonstrating the exceptional effort that has 
gone into improving outcomes for prime shareholders.

Strong television revenue growth in the first half saw 
the television division off to a terrific start to the year. 
Management supported that revenue upswing with a raft 
of new initiatives to drive incremental audience growth 
and revenue opportunity. A new digital channel, 7mate, 
added to the increased pallet of opportunity for the 
television business, which delivered year on year eBItDA 
growth of 14%.

With a 46% increase in eBItDA, the Queensland radio 
division has delivered an exceptional result against a 
backdrop of declining tourism, a tropical cyclone and 
terrible flooding, all of which greatly impacted local 
economies from the Sunshine Coast to Cairns in the 
far north.

the losses incurred over past years in prime’s online 
division have been substantially improved upon, and 
we look forward to the online division playing an 
increasing role in revenue generation and earnings 
contribution. late in the financial year prime entered 
into a partnership with Yahoo!7 to deliver deeper and 
richer content opportunities to draw larger audiences 
and provide greater opportunities to regional advertisers 
wanting integrated advertising solutions, a space we now 
dominate in the regional broadcasting sector.

Prime media GrouP ANNUAL REPORT 2011

3

CHIEF EXECUTIVE 
OFFICER’S REPORT

I am very pleased to report to you that 
Prime Media Group Limited made the 
most of its opportunities in the 2011 
financial year to deliver an $81.6 million 
turn around in profit resulting from the 
disposal of non-broadcasting assets, 
strong growth in television revenue and 
an exceptional improvement in earnings 
from the radio division. 

this result is the outcome of a company-wide review of operations and 
the completion of the disposal of the outside broadcasting Australian 
and new Zealand businesses and Moonlight Cinemas.

Revenue from continuing operations increased in the financial year to 
$257 million, representing a 9% increase on the prior year. eBItDA of 
$59.2 million is 17% above the prior year and reflects improved eBItDA 
margins of 23%, up from 21% in the prior year. this resulted in a net profit 
after tax of $27.2m from continuing operations, an increase of 53%.

Items disclosed as “significant items” contributed $1 million in net 
profit after tax and compared favourably to the prior year net loss 
after tax of $20 million. 

Discontinuing operations resulted in a loss after tax of $1 million 
in the current year, a substantial improvement on the prior year 
loss after tax of $52.2 million and reflecting the finalisation of the 
restructure of the business.

on 30 June 2011 the Company made the decision to exit the out of 
home digital media business. As such the results of the digital media 
business have been classified as discontinuing operations.

4

Prime media GrouP ANNUAL REPORT 2011

5

ChiEf EXECUTiVE OffiCEr’S rEPOrT (ContInueD)

Television – sTrong audience, 
revenue & eBiTda growTh

prime’s television division went through a metamorphosis 
in 2011, rebranding as pRIMe7 on the east coast and 
GWn7 in Western Australia, to benefit from the strength 
of the Seven network brand and affiliation. We also 
enhanced local news bulletins, increased the number of 
local weather reports and introduced unique advertising 
integration opportunities for advertisers across all 
markets, endeavours that have set pRIMe7 apart from 
its competitors.

the Seven network launched its second digital 
multi-channel, 7mate in east coast markets during the year. 
7tWo and 7mate have delivered incremental audience 
share to prime, resulting in a corresponding increase 
in advertising revenue share. the digital channels were 
also recently launched in Western Australia via GWn7.

television advertising revenue grew by 8% to $227.5 
million. national advertising revenue grew by 12.9% year 
on year, outperforming the market which grew at 8.67%, a 
favourable variance of 4.23 percentage points. the national 
television advertising market grew strongly in the first half 
due to the federal election and mining tax advertising.

pRIMe7’s 3 aggregated market television advertising 
revenue growth of 8.77% outperformed market growth 
of 7.14% (KpMG data 3Agg markets). television eBItDA 
of $63.2 million is a 14% increase on the prior year and 
the eBItDA margin increased from 26% to 27%.

pRIMe7’s 3 aggregated market audience share increased 
from 35.1% in FY10 to 36.6% in FY11. pRIMe7’s revenue 
share increased from 36.29% to 36.84%, an increase of 0.55 
percentage points, with agency revenue share increasing 
by an impressive 1.5 percentage points to 39.6%.

television operating costs increased 6% with the majority 
of the increase related to a contracted rate increase in the 
Seven network program supply agreement. Additionally, 
savings arising from an increase in the ACMA license fee 
rebate have been offset by increases in advertising and 
marketing expenses as a result of the re-launch of the 
primary channels as pRIMe7 & GWn7, and the launch 
of digital multi-channel 7mate.

radio – sTrong growTh  
in a difficulT environmenT

prime Radio Group underwent a change process 
that introduced a new senior management team and 
reductions in operating expenses. Advertising revenue 
grew by a modest, but respectable, 3% to $19.7 million 
despite difficult trading conditions in the second half 
arising from the impact of tropical Cyclone Yasi and wide 
spread flooding in regional Queensland. total radio 
revenue also grew by 3% to $21.1 million.

online – losses conTained

An eBItDA loss of $0.9 million in FY11 is a significant 
improvement on the prior year loss of $3.3 million (100% 
of business), reflecting the restructure of the business in 
the first half of 2011. the FY11 result consolidates 100% 
of the results of the on line business following prime’s 
acquisition, on 30 June 2010, of the 66% of the business 
it did not already own. the FY10 result includes prime’s 
33% investment in the online business.

More recently we executed an agreement for the 
provision of content by Yahoo!7 that has enriched the 
site and broadened its appeal. We continue working 
hard to bring the on line division to an earnings positive 
position in the near future.

exiT from Pdm – ouT of home media

At 30 June 2011, we closed prime’s out of home digital 
signage business, trading as prime Digital Media. All 
costs associated with this exit have been fully provided 
for as at 30 June 2011.

imProved deBT & gearing levels

the Group’s debt level (net of cash on hand) has 
decreased in the current year by $51.4 million or 27% 
to a closing balance of $135.7 million. this is largely 
attributable to the sale of the outside broadcasting 
business during the current year, which was carrying 
debt of $24.1 million, in addition to the receipt, by the 
Group, of sale proceeds of $20.5 million from the sale of 
this business. the remaining improvement is attributable 
to our growth in profitability. Accordingly the Company’s 
gearing ratio improved from 58% at 30 June 2010, to 
47% at 30 June 2011.

the company’s current bank loan facility for $260 million 
expires in July 2012. Management has been working 
with the Company’s bankers and secured commitments 
for $200 million in bank loan financing repayable in full 
in 4 years time. the Company expects to execute the 
new facility agreement on 30 September 2011.

It’s been an exciting year at prime Media Group. We’ve 
made the tough decisions and taken the necessary steps 
to pave the way for stronger performance and improved 
returns to shareholders. 

I thank the Board for its tremendous support and the 
management and staff of all divisions who have worked 
tirelessly, but with great creativity and passion, to improve 
the performance of the group.

Due to a wide ranging cost review and restructure of 
the radio business, eBItDA increased 46% to $4.8 million 
with margins increasing year on year from 16% to 23%. 

ian audsley 
CEO

6

1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.  Home and Away
2.  Winners and losers
3.  Downton Abbey
4.  packed to the Rafters
5.  Australia’s Got talent
6.  Sunday night
7.  Grey’s Anatomy
8.  Better Homes and Gardens

Prime media GrouP ANNUAL REPORT 2011

7

CORPORATE INFORMATION

ABN 97 000 764 867
This annual report covers both Prime Media Group Limited (“the Company”) as an individual entity and the consolidated entity comprising Prime Media 
Group Limited and its subsidiaries (“the Group”). The Group’s functional and presentation currency is AUD ($).

NAme

Directors

Paul Joseph Ramsay AO

Michael Stanley Siddle

Lachlan Keith Murdoch

Peter John Evans

Alexander Andrew Hamill

Ian Patrick Grier AM

Ian Richard Neal

Siobhan Louise McKenna

Ian Craig Audsley

Company secretaries

Robert Reeve

Andrew Cooper

Lesley Kennedy

RegisteReD offiCe
363 Antill Street 
Watson ACT 2602 
(02) 6242 3700

PositioN

DAte APPoiNteD

DAte ResigNeD

Chairman

Deputy Chairman

17 April 1985

17 April 1985

7 October 2010

27 March 1991

2 October 2003

6 June 2008

6 June 2008

20 August 2009

Chief Executive Officer

24 June 2010

–

–

9 November 2010

–

–

–

–

–

–

20 February 2009

16 June 2005

16 December 2010

14 October 2010

–

–

shARe RegisteR
Link Market Services Limited 
Level 12 
680 George Street 
Sydney NSW 2000 
Ph: 1300 554 474 
Prime Media Group Limited shares are listed on the Australian Securities Exchange (Listing Code PRT).

BANk
ANZ 
8/20 Martin Place 
Sydney NSW 2000

AuDitoRs
Ernst & Young 
680 George Street 
Sydney NSW 2000

8

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

Your directors submit their report for the year ended 30 June 2011.

DiReCtoRs 
The names and details of the Company’s directors in office during the 
financial year and until the date of this report are as follows. Directors 
were in office for this entire period unless otherwise stated.

NAmes, quAlifiCAtioNs, exPeRieNCe AND sPeCiAl 
ResPoNsiBilities 

PAul JosePh RAmsAy Ao 
Non-executive Chairman (appointed 17 April 1985)

Mr Ramsay is Chairman of Paul Ramsay Holdings Pty Limited, a major 
shareholder of the Company. He is also the Chairman of Ramsay Health 
Care Limited, Australia’s largest private hospital owner. Mr Ramsay 
has more than 45 years experience in real estate, health care, media 
and communications. In 2002, Mr Ramsay was conferred an Officer 
of the Order of Australia for services to the community through the 
establishment of private health care facilities, expanding regional 
television services and as a benefactor to a range of educational, cultural, 
artistic and sporting organisations. In 2009, Mr Ramsay was appointed 
Chairman of Sydney Football Club.

miChAel stANley siDDle
Non-executive Deputy Chairman (appointed 17 April 1985)

Mr Siddle has been Deputy Chairman of Paul Ramsay Holdings Pty Limited 
since 1967. He is also Deputy Chairman of Ramsay Health Care Limited 
and has been a Director of Prime Media Group since 1985.

PeteR JohN evANs fCA
Non-executive Director (appointed 27 march 1991)

Mr Evans is a Chartered Accountant, and was in public practice for almost 
20 years with predecessor firms of KPMG. He has been a Director of Paul 
Ramsay Holdings Pty Limited since 1987. 

He is the Chairman of the Audit and Risk Committee and a member of the 
Remuneration and Nomination Committee.

AlexANDeR ANDRew hAmill
Non-executive Director (appointed 2 october 2003)

Mr Hamill has worked in marketing and advertising in Australia and 
globally for over 45 years. Mr Hamill was the Media Director of the 
Australian Olympic Team in Sydney (2000), Athens (2004) and Beijing 
(2008). Mr Hamill is a member of the Remuneration and Nomination 
Committee and until 20 August 2009, he was also a member of the 
Audit and Risk Committee.

iAN PAtRiCk gRieR Am
Non-executive Director (appointed 6 June 2008)

Mr Grier was employed as an executive in the private health care industry 
for more than 20 years and held the position of Chief Executive Officer of 
Ramsay Health Care Limited for 14 years until retiring in June 2008, when 
he continued as a Non-Executive Director of that company. Mr Grier has 
served as both President and Chairman of the Australian Private Hospitals 
Association and sits on a number of industry committees. He is Chairman 
of Relevare Pharmaceuticals and on the Board of Careers Australia Pty Ltd.

He is the Chairman of the Remuneration and Nomination Committee.

iAN RiChARD NeAl
Non-executive Director (appointed 6 June 2008)

Mr Neal is the principal of Management Abroad Pty Limited. He is a 
Chairman for the Executive Connection and consults on business strategy 
and implementation from a perspective of maximising shareholder value. 
Prior to Management Abroad, Mr Neal was co-founder and Managing 
Director of Nanyang Ventures Pty Limited from 1993 to 2004.

Mr Neal’s prior professional background is in financial markets, 
commencing as an equities analyst and moving through various banking 
positions until establishing Nanyang Ventures Pty Limited. Mr Neal is a life 
member of the Financial Services Institute of Australia.

He is a member of the Audit and Risk Committee.

sioBhAN louise mCkeNNA
Non-executive Director (appointed 20 August 2009)

Ms McKenna has extensive media and government experience. She is 
the Managing Partner of Illyria Pty Limited, a major shareholder of the 
Company. Her other directorships include NBNCo, the entity established 
by the Australian Government to build and operate its national broadband 
network and The Australian Ballet. Ms McKenna is on a leave-of-absence 
as a Commissioner of the Productivity Commission. She was previously a 
Partner of a leading global management consulting firm, McKinsey and 
Company.

Ms McKenna was appointed as a member of the Audit and Risk 
Committee on 20 August 2009. 

iAN CRAig AuDsley
Chief executive officer (appointed 16 June 2010) 
executive Director (appointed 24 June 2010)

Mr Audsley has had over 25 years experience in the television industry. 
He has held various senior executive roles at Southern Cross Television, 
the Seven Network and the Nine Network.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

9

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

DiReCtoRs’ iNteRests
The relevant interest of each director in the shares and options issued by the Company at the date of this report is as follows:

P.J.Ramsay AO

M.S.Siddle

P.J.Evans 

A.A.Hamill

I.P.Grier AM

I.R.Neal

S.L.McKenna

I.C.Audsley

oRDiNARy
shARes

oPtioNs oveR
oRDiNARy
shARes

109,903,654

984,082

24,286

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

iNteRests iN CoNtRACts oR PRoPoseD CoNtRACts with the ComPANy
No director has any interest in any contract or proposed contract with the Company other than as disclosed elsewhere in this report.

DiReCtoRshiPs iN otheR listeD eNtities
Directorships of other listed entities held by directors of the Company during the three years immediately before the end of the year are as follows:

DiReCtoR

ComPANy

Paul Joseph Ramsay AO

Michael Stanley Siddle

Peter John Evans

Ian Patrick Grier AM

Ian Richard Neal

Ian Craig Audsley

Ramsay Healthcare Limited (Chairman)

Ramsay Healthcare Limited (Deputy Chairman)

Ramsay Healthcare Limited

Broadcast Production Services Limited (Chairman)(1)

destra Corporation Limited(2)

Ramsay Healthcare Limited

Intrapower Limited

Dyesol Limited

Arasor Limited

Pearl Healthcare Limited

destra Corporation Limited(2)

PeRioD of DiReCtoRshiP

fRom

to

May 1975

May 1975

June 1990

July 2007

April 2008

June 1997

May 2007

September 2006

June 2006

September 2008

June 2008

Present

Present

Present

Present

Present

Present

Present

Present

July 2008

Present

Present

(1)  Broadcast Production Services Limited was delisted from the Australian Securities Exchange on 07 October 2009. 
(2)  destra Corporation Limited was delisted from the Australian Securities Exchange on 31 August 2009.

ComPANy seCRetARies

ms lesley keNNeDy
Ms Kennedy was appointed as Company Secretary on 16 December 2010. She has been a Chartered Accountant for the past 17 years and currently holds 
the role of Chief Financial Officer of Prime Media Group Limited.

mR ANDRew CooPeR
Mr Cooper was appointed as Company Secretary in June 2005. He has been a Chartered Accountant for the past 15 years and currently holds the role of 
Group Financial Controller for Prime Media Group Limited.

eARNiNgs PeR shARe 

Basic earnings per share

Basic earnings per share – continuing operations

Basic earnings per share from continuing operations before significant items (Note 7(d))

Diluted earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share – continuing operations

Diluted earnings per share from continuing operations before significant items (Note 7(d))

DiviDeNDs 

Final dividend recommended – on ordinary shares

Dividends paid in the year: Interim for the year on ordinary shares

Final for 2010 shown as recommended in the 2010 financial report on ordinary shares

10

CeNts

7.4

7.7

7.4

7.4

7.7

7.4

CeNts

$’000

2.4

2.1

1.4

8,792

7,693

5,129

12,822

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

PRiNCiPAl ACtivities
The principal activities during the financial year of entities within the 
consolidated entity were:

regional television broadcasting;
regional radio broadcasting;

•	
•	
•	 outside broadcast production; and
•	 film exhibition under the Moonlight Cinema brand

Other than the discontinuance of the outside broadcast production 
segment and the film exhibition operations resulting from the sale of the 
Australian and New Zealand outside broadcast production businesses 
and the Moonlight Cinema business, there have been no other significant 
changes in the nature of these activities during the year.

oPeRAtiNg AND fiNANCiAl Review

gRouP oveRview
During the year the Group disposed of the outside broadcasting businesses 
in Australian and New Zealand. The sale of the Australian business was 
completed on 28 October 2010 and the sale of the New Zealand business 
was completed on 9 July 2010. Both transactions are discussed in further 
detail below.

During the year the Group disposed of the Moonlight outdoor cinema 
business. The sale was completed on 1 October 2010.

On 30 June 2011, the Group exited the out of home digital media business.

This completes the rationalisation of the group’s operations to its core 
operating segments of:

regional television broadcasting;
regional radio broadcasting; and

•	
•	
•	 online media

PeRfoRmANCe iNDiCAtoRs
Management and the board monitor the Group’s overall performance, 
from its implementation of the mission statement and strategic plan 
through to the performance of the Group against operating plans and 
financial budgets.

The board, together with management, have identified key performance 
indicators (KPIs) that are used to monitor performance monthly. Key 
management monitor KPIs on a regular basis. Directors receive the KPIs 
for review prior to each board meeting allowing all directors to actively 
monitor the Group’s performance.

DyNAmiCs of the BusiNess
The television advertising market remains the primary source of the Group’s 
revenue, representing 88% (2010: 88%) of the Group’s total revenue. During 
the current year the Group’s television advertising revenues grew by 8% 
which exceeded the overall market growth of 7.1% (Per KPMG Market 
Revenue reports).

During the year Golden West Network Pty Limited, a wholly owned 
subsidiary, entered into a joint venture arrangement with a third party to 
contract with the Commonwealth Government for the provision of their 
Viewer Access Satellite Television service in Western Australia (“WA VAST”) 
providing digital television in remote Western Australia. Under the terms 
of the agreement the Commonwealth Government will fund all capital and 
operating expenditure associated with the provision of this service up to an 
amount of $40 million over a 9 year period to 30 June 2020.

Revenue for the radio business grew 5% on the previous year. The radio 
business encountered difficult operating conditions during the current year. 
In the first half of the year the division achieved revenue growth of 6% but 
second half growth was heavily impacted by the Queensland floods and 
Cyclone Yasi, which resulted in no growth in the second half of the year.

During the current year the Group completed the sale of its outside 
broadcast production and Moonlight cinema businesses.

The outside broadcasting businesses were sold in two separate 
transactions. The sale of the New Zealand operations to Sky Network 
Television Limited was completed on 9 July 2010 and the sale of the 
Australian operations to Gearhouse Broadcast Pty Limited was completed 
on 28 October 2010. The board made the decision to dispose of these 
businesses following a strategic review of the capital employed within the 
Group. These businesses operated in markets outside of the Company’s 
core competencies. Additionally, the level of capital investment required 

by these businesses would have diverted valuable resources from the 
Group’s more profitable core activities.

Under the terms of the sale agreement for the New Zealand business 
the Company has entered into an “earn out” arrangement whereby the 
Company is entitled to share in the ongoing profits of the business over 
a 4 year period whilst also retaining 100% of the profits generated from 
the 2011 Rugby World Cup event held in New Zealand in the following 
financial year.

The sale of the Moonlight cinema business was completed on 1 October 
2010. This business was not part of the Company’s core activities and its 
contribution to the overall group result was minimal.

On 30 June 2011, the Group exited its out of home digital media business. 
This business was not part of the Group’s core activities and continued 
to report losses, despite the Group taking up, in prior years, significant 
provisions against onerous contracts in this business. All costs associated with 
the exit from this business have been fully provided for as at 30 June 2011.

The divestments that the Group has made during the current year has 
allowed the Group to reduce the level of debt it is carrying whilst also 
allowing management to concentrate on its core activities and drive 
improved returns in both the television and radio businesses.

oPeRAtiNg Results foR the yeAR
The consolidated net profit after tax of the Group attributable to the 
members of Prime Media Group Limited for the full year of $27,166,000 
(2010: loss $54,459,000) represents an increase of $81,625,000 from the 
prior year. 

Excluding the impact of discontinued operations and significant items, 
the net profit after tax from continuing operations for the full year 
of $27,207,000 (2010: $17,735,000) was $9,472,000 or 53% up on the 
previous corresponding period. (Refer to Note 7(d) of the accounts for 
a reconciliation of the profit reported in the Consolidated Statement 
of Comprehensive Income to profit before the impact of discontinued 
operations and significant items).

Review of oPeRAtioNs
Revenue from continuing operations of $256,998,000 represents a growth 
of $20,484,000, or 9%, on the prior year and exceeds growth in the 
regional television advertising market as quoted by KPMG of 7.1% (AMB, 
AMC and AMD). The introduction of Prime’s digital channels 7TWO, 
introduced in March 2010 and 7mate, introduced in October 2010, has 
contributed to this growth.

Cost of Sales has increased by $9,110,000 or 7.7% to $127,613,000 
reflecting an improved Gross Margin % of 50.3% (2010: 49.9%). This is 
primarily due to a reduction in ACMA licence fees payable as a result of 
the increase in rebate rate to 41.5% in the current year (2010: 16.5%).

Broadcasting and transmission expenses increased by $4,514,000 or 10.1% 
to $49,040,000 as a result of the introduction of the new digital channels; 
7TWO and 7mate during the current year and increased program 
advertising.

Administration expenses decreased by $1,797,000 or 9.3% to $17,573,000 
reflecting the benefits of the Group’s cost review program undertaken 
during the current year. 

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

11

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

oPeRAtiNg AND fiNANCiAl Review (CONTINUED)

shAReholDeR RetuRNs
Whilst the share price has remained relatively static at $0.69 (2010: $0.72) the Company is pleased to report that there has been improvement in returns to 
shareholders through increased dividends and significant improvement in most other financial measures in the current year.

Basic Earnings Per Share (cents)(i)

Return on Assets (%)(i)

Weighted Average Cost of Capital (%)

Return on Equity (%)(i)(ii)

Net Debt (Net Debt + Equity) Ratio (%)

Share price ($)

Dividends per share (cents)

Total Shareholder Return (%)

2011

7.3

7.2

11.8

11.9

47

0.69

4.5

2.1

2010

4.8

4.3

10.9

8.3

58

0.72

2.6

49.2

(i)  These returns have been calculated using net profit after tax before the impact of items disclosed as significant items. (Refer to Note 34 for details of significant items in 

relation to both the continuing and discontinuing operations of the business).
(ii)  Equity has been normalised for the impact of items disclosed as significant items.

Review of fiNANCiAl CoNDitioNs

Liquidity and capital resources
The Consolidated Cash Flow Statement illustrates that there was an increase in cash and cash equivalents in the year ended 30 June 2011 of $13,714,000 
(2010: decrease $1,116,000). The increase in ash flows in comparison to the prior year is attributable to a number of factors. Operating activities generated 
$34,419,000 (2010: $33,166,000) of net cash flows representing an increase of $1,253,000, or +3.8% on the prior year. The inclusion of the discontinued 
operations in the cash flow statement is masking the underlying improvement in the cash flows from continuing operating activities. The discontinued 
operations incurred a cash outflow of $7,608,000 relating to operating activities largely as a result of payments made under onerous contracts.

Cash inflows from investing activities of $10,160,000 (2010: $27,272,000 cash outflow) compares favourably to the prior year. The current year includes a 
cash inflow of $20,508,000 relating to sale proceeds from the sale of businesses whilst the prior year included significant capital expenditure amounts 
relating to these same businesses. This favourable variance in cash inflows was offset by cash outflows relating to financing activities of $30,865,000 (2010: 
$7,010,000 cash outflow). The increase in cash outflow largely reflects repayment of debt and increased dividend payments to shareholders.

Capital structure

Interest-bearing loan and borrowings

Derivative financial instruments

Cash and short term deposits

Net debt 

Total equity

Total capital employed

Gearing

Profile of debt
The profile of the Group’s debt finance is as follows:

Current

Obligations under finance leases

Derivative financial instruments

Liabilities directly associated with assets held for sale.

Non-current

Obligations under finance leases

Secured bank loan 

12

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

153,450

1,687

(19,374)

135,763

153,113

288,876

2010
$’000

189,771

3,020

(5,664)

187,127

137,310

324,437

47%

58%

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

627

1,687

–

2,314

2,799

150,024

152,823

155,137

2010
$’000

408

3,020

24,162

27,590

3,057

162,144

165,201

192,791

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

The Group’s debt level has decreased in the current year largely as a result 
of the sale of the outside broadcasting business during the current year, 
which was carrying $24,162,000 of debt. Additionally improved profitability 
of the continuing operations and sale proceeds from the businesses 
disposed of during the current year have contributed to the reduction in the 
level of debt, as reflected in the improved gearing ratio above. The Group 
anticipates that its debt will continue to decrease over the coming year.

Subsequent to the financial year end the Company has secured 
commitments from its bankers for $200,000,000 in bank loan financing 
repayable in full in 4 years. The Company expects to execute the new 
facility on 30 September 2011.

Capital expenditure
Capital expenditure of $9,727,000 in the current year (2010: $26,259,000) 
is a return to more normal levels. The prior year amount included the 
acquisition of two new high definition outside broadcasting vans which have 
subsequently been sold as part of the disposal of the outside broadcasting 
business. The Group expects capital expenditure requirements for the 2012 
financial year will be in line with the current year levels.

Risk mANAgemeNt
The Group takes a proactive approach to risk management. The Board is 
responsible for ensuring that risks, and also opportunities, are identified 
on a timely basis and that the Group’s objectives and activities are aligned 
with the risks and opportunities identified by the Board.

The Group has reviewed its risk management approach during the 
current year and identified the need to increase focus in this area. As a 
consequence, the Board has reviewed the structure of its sub-committees 
and has reinstated the Audit Committee as an Audit and Risk Committee 
and published a revised committee charter document.

A comprehensive review of the Group’s risk management objectives and 
processes is currently underway, including the development of a risk 
register and an appropriate framework to review and monitor risks.

The Board has a number of mechanisms in place to ensure that 
management’s objectives and activities are aligned with the risks identified 
by the Board. These include the following:

•	 Board approval of a strategic plan, which encompasses the 

•	

Group’s vision, mission and strategy statements, designed to meet 
stakeholders’ needs and manage business risk.
Implementation of Board approved operating plans and budgets 
and Board monitoring of progress against these budgets, including 
the establishment and monitoring of KPIs of both a financial and 
non-financial nature.

•	 The establishment of committees to report on specific business risks 
such as environmental issues and occupational health and safety.

Risk management is further addressed in the Corporate Governance 
Statement.

sigNifiCANt ChANges iN the stAte of AffAiRs 
On 1 October 2010, the Moonlight Cinema business was sold.

On 9 July 2010, the New Zealand outside broadcasting business was sold.

On 28 October 2010, the Australian outside broadcasting business was sold.

Effective 30 June 2011, the Group exited the out of home digital media 
business.

sigNifiCANt eveNts AfteR the BAlANCe DAte 
On 26 August 2011 the Company secured a commitment from its 
bankers to provide a $200 million bank loan facility with a term of 4 years, 
repayable in full on expiry. Interest will be charged at a rate of BBSY plus a 
margin of between 1.70% and 2.60%. Formal documentation is expected 
to be executed on 30 September 2011.

likely DeveloPmeNts AND exPeCteD Results 
The broad areas of focus for the 2012 financial year will be:

•	 continue to drive improved returns from the Group’s core operations of 

regional broadcasting; and

•	 continued prudent management of debt and risk generally, 

with a view to optimising returns to shareholders.

eNviRoNmeNtAl RegulAtioN AND PeRfoRmANCe 
The Group’s operations are subject to various environmental regulations in 
the jurisdictions and industry in which it has a presence. 

In each of the jurisdictions, the Group has established an environmental 
management system, which monitors compliance with existing 
environmental regulations and new regulations as they are enacted. The 
management system includes procedures to be followed, in conjunction 
with actions to be taken by third parties, should an incident occur 
which adversely impacts the environment. The Group’s operations hold 
all relevant licences and permits and have implemented monitoring 
procedures to ensure that it complies with licence conditions.

The Group has established data collection systems and processes to 
monitor the Group’s potential reporting requirements under the National 
Greenhouse and Energy Reporting Act. For the year ended 30 June 2011 
the Group has not exceeded the thresholds that require it to become 
registered under the NGER legislation.

The Directors are not aware of any breaches of any legislation during the 
financial year, which are material in nature. 

shARe oPtioNs 

uNissueD shARes
As at the date of this report there were Nil (2010: 5,250,000) unissued 
ordinary shares under options. Refer to note 28 of the financial statements 
for further information. 

Option holders do not have any right, by virtue of the option, to 
participate in any share issue of the company or any related body 
corporate. 

shARes issueD As A Result of the  
exeRCise of oPtioNs 
During the financial year, employees and executives have not exercised 
any options to acquire ordinary shares in Prime Media Group Limited.

iNDemNifiCAtioN AND iNsuRANCe  
of DiReCtoRs AND offiCeRs
In accordance with the Corporations Act 2001, the directors disclose 
that the Company has a Directors’ and Officers’ Liability policy covering 
each of the directors and certain executive officers for liabilities incurred 
in the performance of their duties and as specifically allowed under the 
Corporations Act 2001. During the year, Prime Media Group Limited paid 
premiums totaling $115,382 in relation to the Directors’ and Officers’ 
Liability policy. The terms of the policy specifically prohibit the disclosure 
of any other details relating to the policy and therefore the directors are 
not disclosing further particulars relating thereto. 

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

13

RemuNeRAtioN At A glANCe

2. 
During the current year the Company engaged an external remuneration 
consultant to undertake a full review of executive and NED remuneration. 
This review included:

•	 A benchmarking review of existing executive and NED remuneration 

arrangements against comparable positions in comparable companies; 
•	 A review of existing short term incentive (STI) arrangements currently in 
place and design of a new uniform STI plan to be implemented in the 
financial year ending 30 June 2012; and

•	 A review of existing long term incentive (LTI) arrangements currently in 
place and design of a new uniform LTI plan to be implemented in the 
financial year ending 30 June 2012.

This report details the remuneration arrangements in place during 
the current year and the remuneration arrangements the company is 
transitioning to in the following financial year, as a result of the above 
mentioned review.

The Company’s remuneration strategy involves management of 3 
complimentary components of executive reward, namely total fixed 
remuneration (TFR), short term incentives (STI) and long term incentives (LTI).

As part of the review of the Company’s remuneration strategy it is the 
Company’s intention to pay total fixed remuneration in the 55th to 62.5th 
percentile of its defined talent market to ensure a competitive offering 
and to ensure outperformance is rewarded through variable remuneration 
components only.

There have been no material changes to the short term incentive bonus 
plan for the 2011 financial year. For 2011 performance period, 100% of the 
STI bonus pool has been accrued and expected to be paid in September 
2011. The total STI pool for 2011 was $774,453.

Long term incentive arrangements in 2011 include a loan forgiveness 
plan and a share option plan. Benefits under the loan forgiveness plan 
are received on achievement of service conditions. The share options 
vest based on attainment of a predetermined share price in addition to 
achievement of service conditions.

Following a review of the LTI arrangements currently in place, on 30 June 
2011 the company cancelled the options on issue under the share option 
plan and intend to issue to select executives performance rights under 
a new LTI plan with predetermined performance conditions linked to 
the earnings per share (EPS) of the Company and the Company’s power 
ratio (revenue share: audience share), with service conditions of 3 years 
applying. The loan forgiveness plan is in run off mode and will cease with 
effect from 30 June 2012.

The remuneration of non-executive directors of the Company consists only 
of directors’ fees. NED fees have reduced in the current year reflecting the 
reduction in scope of certain director’s responsibilities on rationalisation of 
the group.

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

RemuNeRAtioN RePoRt (AuDiteD)
This remuneration report for the year ended 30 June 2011 outlines the 
remuneration arrangements of the Company and the Group in accordance 
with the requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 (the Act) and its 
regulations. This information has been audited as required by section 
308(3C) of the Act.

The remuneration report details the remuneration arrangements for Key 
Management Personnel (KMP) of the Company and the Group. For the 
purposes of this report Key Management Personnel (KMP) of the Group 
are defined as those persons having authority and responsibility for 
planning, directing and controlling the major activities of the Company 
and Group, directly or indirectly, including any director (whether executive 
or otherwise) of the Company, and includes the five executives in the 
Company and the Group receiving the highest remuneration. 

For the purposes of this report, the term ‘executive’ includes the Chief 
Executive Officer (CEO), executive directors, senior executives, general 
managers and secretaries of the Company and the Group and the term 
‘director’ refers to non-executive directors (NED) only. 

The remuneration report is presented under the following sections:

1.  Individual key management personnel disclosures

2.  Remuneration at a glance

3.  Board oversight of remuneration

4.  Non-executive director remuneration arrangements

5.  Executive remuneration arrangements

6.  Company performance and the link to remuneration

7.  Executive contractual arrangements

8.  Equity Instrument disclosures

1. 

 iNDiviDuAl key mANAgemeNt 
PeRsoNNel DisClosuRes

Details of KMP including the top five remunerated executives of the Parent 
and Group are set out below.

Key management personnel
(i)  Directors

P.J.Ramsay AO Chairman (non-executive)

M.S.Siddle

Deputy Chairman (non-executive)

L.K.Murdoch

Director (non-executive)  
– appointed 7 Oct 2010, 
resigned 9 Nov 2010

P.J.Evans

Director (non-executive)

A.A.Hamill

Director (non-executive)

I.P.Grier AM

Director (non-executive)

I.R.Neal

Director (non-executive)

S.L.McKenna

Director (non-executive)

I.C.Audsley

Director (Chief Executive Officer)

(ii) executives

D.Edwards

Chief Executive Officer – Television

G.Smith

Chief Technology Officer 

L.Kennedy

Chief Financial Officer (appointed 6 Dec 2010)

D.Walker

S.Wood

R.Gamble

R.Reeve

National Sales Manager (appointed 27 Sept 2010)

Director – Integration and Digital Media

Chief Executive Officer – Radio and Digital Media 
(resigned 5 Nov 2010)

Group General Counsel (resigned 29 Sept 2010) and 
Company Secretary (resigned 14 Oct 2010)

P.Stubbings

Chief Financial Officer (resigned 8 Dec 2010)

There have been no changes to KMP after reporting date and before the 
date this financial report was authorised for issue.

14

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

3. 

BoARD oveRsight of RemuNeRAtioN

Remuneration and Nomination Committee
The Remuneration and Nomination Committee is responsible for making 
recommendations to the board on the remuneration arrangements for 
non-executive directors (NEDs) and executives.

The Remuneration and Nomination Committee assesses the 
appropriateness of the nature and amount of remuneration of NEDs 
and executives on a periodic basis by reference to relevant employment 
market conditions, with the overall objective of ensuring maximum 
shareholder benefit from the retention of a high performing director and 
executive team. In determining the level and composition of executive 
remuneration, the Remuneration and Nomination Committee also 
engages external consultants to provide independent advice.

The Remuneration and Nomination Committee comprises 3 non-executive 
directors including 2 independent non-executive directors. Further 
information on the committee’s role, responsibilities and membership can 
be seen at www.primemedia.com.au.

Remuneration approval process
The board approves the remuneration arrangements of the CEO and 
executives and all awards made under the long-term incentive (LTI) plan, 
following recommendations from the Remuneration and Nomination 
Committee. The board also sets the aggregate remuneration of NEDs 
which is then subject to shareholder approval.

The Remuneration and Nomination Committee approves, having regard 
to the recommendations made by the CEO, the level of the Group short 
term incentive (STI) pool.

Remuneration strategy
The Company’s remuneration strategy is designed to attract, motivate and 
retain employees and NEDs by identifying and rewarding high performers 
and recognising the contributions of each employee in achieving 
continued growth of the Group.

To this end, key objectives of the Company’s reward framework are to 
ensure that remuneration practices:

•	 Are aligned to the Group’s business strategy;
•	 Offer competitive remuneration benchmarked against the external 

market;

•	 Provide strong linkage between individual and Group performance 

and rewards; and

•	 Align the interests of executives and shareholders.

Remuneration structure
In accordance with best practice corporate governance, the structure 
of non-executive director and executive remuneration is separate and 
distinct.

4. 

 NoN-exeCutive DiReCtoR 
RemuNeRAtioN ARRANgemeNts

Remuneration policy
The board seeks to set aggregate remuneration at a level that provides 
the Company with the ability to attract and retain directors of the highest 
calibre, whilst incurring a cost that is acceptable to shareholders.

The amount of aggregate remuneration sought to be approved by 
shareholders and the fee structure is reviewed annually against fees paid 
to NEDs of comparable companies. The board considers advice from 
external consultants when undertaking the annual review process. 

The Company’s Constitution and the ASX Listing rules specify that 
the NED fee pool shall be determined from time to time by a general 
meeting. The latest determination was at the annual general meeting 
(AGM) held in November 2007 when shareholders approved an aggregate 
fee pool of $750,000 per annum (excluding superannuation and retirement 
benefits arising under the Directors’ Retirement Plan).

The board will not seek any increase for the NED pool at the 2011 AGM.

structure
The remuneration of NEDs consists of directors’ fees. Each director 
receives a fixed annual fee. One NED is currently entitled to benefits under 
the Directors Retirement Plan, approved by shareholders in November 
1997. The board agreed to discontinue the Directors Retirement Plan in 
the 2008 financial year for all new directors appointed after that date.

The NED fees in 2011 are $132,238 or 22% lower than the NED fees in 
the prior year reflecting the reduced scope of responsibilities of certain 
directors on rationalisation of the group. During the current financial year 
the company engaged an external consultant to perform an independent 
review of NED fees. As a result of this review with effect from 1 July 2011, 
NED fees will increase by $132,600 to $600,000 per annum to align with 
market rates.

The remuneration of NEDs for the year ended 30 June 2011 and 30 June 
2010 is detailed in table 1 and 2 in section 7.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

15

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

RemuNeRAtioN RePoRt (AuDiteD) (CONTINUED)

5. 

exeCutive RemuNeRAtioN ARRANgemeNts

Remuneration levels and mix
The Group aims to reward executives with a level and mix of remuneration commensurate with their position and responsibilities within the Group and 
aligned with market practice.

The recently updated remuneration policy of the Company is to aim to pay total fixed remuneration (TFR) in the 55th to 62.5th percentile of its defined 
talent market to ensure a competitive offering and to ensure outperformance is rewarded through variable remuneration components only.

In the current financial year:

•	 The CEO’s target remuneration mix comprises 51% TFR, 20% target STI opportunity and 29% LTI. The LTI value includes the current year accounting 

expense associated with previous grants of share based payments as disclosed in table 1 and 2 in section 7.

•	 Other Executive’s target remuneration mix comprises 68% TFR, 19% target STI opportunity and 13% LTI.

The remuneration strategy was recently updated on conclusion of a detailed review of executive remuneration and adopted by the board. It outlines the 
following targets which the Company aims to transition to:

•	 The CEO’s target remuneration mix comprises 40-50% TFR, 25-30% target STI opportunity and 25-30% LTI.
•	 Other executive’s target remuneration mix comprises 50-60% TFR, 20-25% target STI opportunity and 20-25% LTI.

The implementation of a new executive LTI plan in FY 2012 will assist in the transition to the above remuneration mix targets.

structure
In the 2011 financial year, the executive remuneration framework consisted of the following components:

•	 Fixed remuneration; and
•	 Variable remuneration.

The table below illustrates the structure of the Company’s executive remuneration arrangements:

RemuNeRAtioN 
ComPoNeNt

vehiCle

PuRPose

liNk to PeRfoRmANCe

Fixed remuneration

•	 Represented by total employment 

•	 Set with reference to role, market 

•	 No link to Company performance

cost (TEC)

and experience

•	 Comprises base salary, 

•	 Executives are given the 

superannuation contributions 
and other benefits

STI component

•	 Paid in cash

opportunity to receive their fixed 
remuneration in a variety of 
forms including cash and fringe 
benefits such as motor vehicles. 
It is intended that the manner of 
payment chosen will be optimal 
for the recipient without creating 
undue cost to the Group

•	 Rewards executives for their 
contribution to achievement 
of Group and business unit 
outcomes, as well as individual 
key performance indicators (KPIs)

LTI component

•	 Awards are made in the form of 

share options

•	 From FY 12 onwards, awards 
will be made in the form of 
performance rights

•	 Rewards executives for their 
contribution to the creation 
of shareholder value over the 
longer term

•	 EBITDA, Revenue and EPS are the key 
financial metrics in FY 11 (new STI plan 
implemented in FY 12: Earnings per 
share (EPS) is the key financial metric);

•	 Linked to other internal financial 

measures, market share, power ratio, 
customer service, risk management 
and leadership

•	 Vesting of awards is dependent on 
the achievement of pre determined 
share price targets. (new LTI plan 
implemented in FY 12: vesting of 
awards dependent on the achievement 
of EPS and power ratio targets)

Fixed remuneration
Executive contracts of employment do not include any guaranteed base pay increases.

TEC is reviewed annually by the Remuneration and Nomination Committee. The process consists of a review of Company, business unit and individual 
performance, relevant comparative remuneration internally and externally and, where appropriate, external advice independent of management.

The fixed component of executive remuneration is detailed in Table 1 and Table 2 in section 7.

Variable remuneration – short Term Incentives (sTI)
The Group operates an annual STI program that is available to executives and awards a cash bonus subject to the attainment of clearly defined Group, 
business unit and individual measures.

The total potential STI available is set at a level so as to provide sufficient incentive to executives to achieve the operational targets and such that the cost 
to the Group is reasonable in the circumstances.

The actual STI payments awarded to each executive depend on the extent to which specific targets set at the beginning of the financial year are met. The 
targets consist of a number of key performance indicators (KPIs) covering financial and non-financial, corporate and individual measures of performance.

16

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

PeRfoRmANCe meAsuRes

Financial measures:
•	 Divisional EBITDA
•	 Group EBITDA
•	 Earnings per share
•	 Product yield management

Non-financial measures:
•	 Market shares
•	 Customer relations
•	

Implementation of strategic 
organisational plans

•	 Risk management
•	 Leadership contributions

PRoPoRtioN of sti AwARD 
meAsuRe APPlies to

50% – 100%

0% – 50%

These measures were chosen as they represent the key drivers for the 
short-term success of the business and provide a framework for delivering 
long term value. The STI opportunity linked to financial measures covers 
a range from 50% to 100% and varies depending upon each individual 
executive’s ability to influence results at a group level and/or divisional level. 

In relation to the new STI plan implemented in FY 2012, financial measures 
more strongly aligned with shareholders interests have been adopted. 
Group EBITDA and Divisional EBITDA are no longer included as financial 
measures and all executives have 25% – 50% of their STI opportunity 
linked to EPS targets.

The aggregate of the annual STI payments available for executives across 
the Group is subject to the approval of the Remuneration and Nomination 
Committee. On an annual basis, after consideration of performance 
against KPI’s, the Remuneration and Nomination Committee, in line with 
their responsibilities, determine the amount, if any, of the short term 
incentive paid to each executive. This process usually occurs within three 
months after the reporting date. Payments made are delivered as a cash 
bonus in the following reporting period.

sTI awards for 2010 and 2011 financial years
For the 2010 financial year, 79% of the STI cash bonus pool of $446,213 as 
previously accrued in that period vested to executives and was paid in the 
2011 financial year. There were no forfeitures.

The Remuneration and Nomination Committee will consider the STI 
payments for the 2011 financial year in September 2011. The maximum 
STI cash bonus available for the 2011 financial year is $774,453. STI 
payments have been accrued at 91% of the maximum cash bonus available 
for the 2011 financial year based on individual executive’s performance 
against KPI’s. Any adjustments between the actual amounts to be paid 
in September 2011 as determined by the Remuneration and Nomination 
Committee and the amounts accrued will be adjusted in the 2012 financial 
year. The minimum amount of the STI cash bonus assuming that no 
executives meet their respective KPI’s for the 2011 financial year is nil. 

There was no alteration to the STI bonus plan for the year however as 
noted above a new plan has been implemented in FY 2012 which more 
strongly aligns executive remuneration with shareholder returns.

The STI component of executives’ remuneration is outlined in Table 1 and 
Table 2 in section 7.

Variable remuneration – Long Term Incentives (LTI)
LTI awards are made to executives in order to align remuneration with 
the creation of shareholder value over the long term. As such, LTI awards 
are only made to executives and other key talent who have an impact on 
the Group’s performance against the relevant long-term performance 
measure.

During the year the company had in place the following LTI plans:

•	 Share Option plan
•	 Loan Forgiveness plan

A recommendation from the executive remuneration review project 
undertaken during the current financial year was to cease any future 
awards under these plans and to transition to a new LTI plan in the form of 
awards of Performance Rights with performance conditions more closely 
aligned to shareholder returns and minimum 3 year service conditions 

more aligned with contemporary corporate governance requirements.

As such, the options on issue under the share option plan were cancelled 
on 30 June 2011 and the loan forgiveness plan will be wound up effective 
30 June 2012.

At 30 June 2011 there are currently no options on issue under any LTI plan. 
It is the Boards intention to issue performance rights to certain executives 
in September 2011, and for those executives currently receiving benefit 
under the loan forgiveness plan, consideration will be given to awarding 
those executives with performance rights when the loan forgiveness plan 
is wound up on 1 July 2012.

The report below outlines the plans in place during the current financial 
year and the new plans introduced in the 2012 financial year.

LTI – share option plan (ceased effective 30 June 2011)

Structure
LTI awards to executives are made under the employee share option plan 
and are delivered in the form of share options. Each option entitles the 
holder to one fully paid ordinary share in the company. In FY 2011 and 
FY 2010 the CEO was the only executive with options on issue under the 
plan. The options vest 1/3rd after 1 year (tranche 1) 1/3rd after 2 years 
(tranche 2) and 1/3rd after 3 years (tranche 3) from the grant date subject 
to meeting share price targets, with no opportunity to retest. The exercise 
price of the options is set at 120% of the market price at the date of grant. 
The options can be exercised up to 5 years from the date of grant.

Performance measure to determine vesting
The Group uses growth in share price as the performance measure for the 
share option plan.

The share options will only vest should the volume weighted average 
price of the Company’s ordinary shares sold on the ASX in the 10 days 
preceding the vesting date, exceed preset targets established on the 
grant date of the options. The share price targets for the options on issue 
during the current year are $1.10 for tranche 1, $1.25 for tranche 2 and 
$1.40 for tranche 3 and represent a premium on the share price at grant 
date of 47%, 67% and 87% respectively.

Termination and change of control provisions
Where a participant ceases employment prior to the vesting of their 
award, the options are forfeited unless the board applies its discretion 
to allow vesting at or post cessation of employment in appropriate 
circumstances.

In the event of a change of control of the Group, the performance period 
end date will generally be brought forward to the date of the change of 
control and awards will vest subject to performance over this shortened 
period, subject to ultimate board discretion.

LTI awards for 2011 financial year
No options were granted under the employee share option plan during 
the current financial year. The options on issue under the plan were 
cancelled on 30 June 2011.

Hedging of equity awards
The Company prohibits executives from entering into arrangements 
to protect the value of unvested LTI awards. The prohibition includes 
entering into contracts to hedge their exposure to options awarded as 
part of their remuneration package.

Adherence to this policy is monitored on an annual basis and involves 
each executive signing an annual declaration of compliance with the 
hedging policy.

Margin loans
In relation to margin loans, it is the Company’s policy that where there is 
(or the director or executive reasonably believes there will be) an unmet 
margin call, an event of default or another similar occurrence, the director 
or executive must immediately disclose to the company secretary or chief 
financial officer the necessary information so the Company can comply 
with its continuous disclosure obligations under the ASX Listing Rules.

Table 3 in section 8 provides details of options awarded and vested during 
the year and table 4 in section 8 provides details of the value of options 
awarded, exercised and lapsed during the year.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

17

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

RemuNeRAtioN RePoRt (AuDiteD) (CONTINUED)

5. 

 exeCutive RemuNeRAtioN 
ARRANgemeNts (CONTINUED)

LTI – Loan Forgiveness Plan (inactive)
During the 2007 financial year loans were granted to certain executives. 
The loans are interest free and the loan amount repayable by the 
executive is reduced on the basis of continued service with the Company. 
20% of the original loan balance is forgiven on the 1 July of each year if 
the executive remains employed with the Company at that date. If the 
executive terminates his or her employment during the five year period 
the balance of the loan at the date of termination is repayable by the 
executive on the date of termination. No loans have been made under 
this plan subsequent to the 2007 financial year and it is the intention of the 
board to wind up this plan on 1 July 2012.

LTI – Performance Rights Plan (to be implemented in FY 2012)

Structure
In FY 2012 the Company’s intention is to provide LTI awards to certain 
executives under a new Employee Performance Rights Plan. Each right 
entitles the holder to one fully paid ordinary share in the Company subject 
to the achievement of certain pre determined performance and service 
conditions. The rights will vest over a period of 3 years subject to meeting 
performance measures, with no opportunity to retest. In relation to 
performance conditions, 60% of the rights will be subject to achievement 
of annual earnings per share (EPS) targets and 40% of the rights will be 
subject to achievement of annual Power Ratio targets (revenue share: 
audience share). The exercise price of the performance rights is nil. The 
rights will lapse 30 days after vesting date.

Performance measure to determine vesting
The Company has selected EPS and Power Ratio targets as performance 
measures as management can influence EPS and the Power Ratio which 
the board believe are fundamental drivers of the financial performance 
which drives returns to shareholders. 

Termination and change of control provisions
Where a participant ceases employment prior to the vesting of their 
award, the performance rights are forfeited unless the board applies 
its discretion to allow vesting at or post cessation of employment in 
appropriate circumstances.

In the event of a change of control of the Group, all unvested performance 
rights will vest on a pro rata basis, unless otherwise determined by the board.

6. 

 ComPANy PeRfoRmANCe AND the liNk to 
RemuNeRAtioN

 Company performance and its link to short-term incentives

(i) 
The key financial performance measures that determine STI payment 
outcomes for Group executives in the current year are:

•	 Earnings per share (EPS); and
•	 EBITDA

Both EPS and EBITDA are normalised for any items disclosed as 
“significant items” when determining STI entitlements.

The following tables outline Prime Media Group Limited’s EPS and EBITDA 
(normalised) over the five year period from 1 July 2006 to 30 June 2011.

EARNINGs PER sHARE
(Cents per share)

25.9

24.3

24.9

10.9

9.9

7.4 7.3

4.8

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

Fully Diluted EPS

Fully Diluted EPS
(normalised)

-15.0

-24.5

EBITDA FROM CONTINUING OPERATIONs
(A$, Million)

76.3

61.4

58.4

55.9

58.8

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

Both EPS and EBITDA performance were strong in the current year relative 
to the prior year. EPS (normalised) grew 52% when compared to the prior 
year. As a result, the board anticipates that executives will receive close 
to 100% of the STI award accrued in the 2011 financial year.

It should be noted that the Company issued 229 million shares in 2009 
as part of a capital raising. This should be considered when reviewing 
the EPS data disclosed in the above table.

18

Other Executives
All other KMP’s have rolling contracts with no fixed term.

The Company may terminate an executive’s employment by providing 
6 months written notice or providing payment in lieu of the notice 
period (based on the fixed component of the executive’s remuneration). 
Executives may terminate their employment agreements by providing 
3-6 months written notice depending on the terms of their agreement. 
The Company may terminate the contract at any time without notice if 
serious misconduct has occurred. Where termination with cause occurs the 
executive is only entitled to that portion of remuneration that is fixed, and 
only up to the date of termination.

Payment to outgoing executives
The following arrangements applied to outgoing executives in office 
during the 2011 financial year:

•	 Mr. Robert Gamble, CEO of Radio, was paid a termination payment 

of $266,158 in accordance with the terms of his contract.

•	 Mr. Robert Reeve, legal counsel, was paid a termination payment 

of $157,241 in accordance with the terms of his contract.

•	 Mr. Paul Stubbings, Chief Financial Officer, was paid a termination 

payment of $100,484 in accordance with the terms of his contract and 
a further discretionary payment of $188,800 in recognition of his service 
and significant contribution on a number of transactions undertaken 
to rationalise the group operations.

The following arrangements applied to outgoing executives in office 
during the 2010 financial year:

Mr Syphers resigned as Chief Executive Officer on 31 March 2010. 
The following termination arrangements applied:

•	 Mr Syphers was entitled to a termination payment of 1.25 times his 

annual salary by virtue of his length of service which totaled $613,750. 
Provision for this payment of $150,000 per year had been made and 
disclosed in the remuneration reports for the year ended 30 June 
2009 and 30 June 2008. The remaining balance of $313,750 has been 
disclosed under termination benefits in the remuneration report of 30 
June 2010; and

•	 Mr Syphers also received a benefit of $746,088 arising from the 

forgiveness, on termination, of an outstanding loan balance of $399,147.

Mr Syphers contract of employment pre-dates the effective date of the 
new executive terminations benefits cap legislation and as such the 
restrictions applying to this legislation did not apply to this termination.

The board acknowledges the regulations applying as a result of the 
termination cap legislation and confirms that all KMP contracts comply 
with this new legislation.

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

(ii)  Company performance and its link to long-term incentives
The key measure that drives the vesting of long term incentives in the 
current year is the Company share price.

The following tables outline the company’s share price over the five year 
period from 1 July 2006 to 30 June 2011.

CLOsING sHARE PRICE AT THE END OF EACH FINANCIAL YEAR 

$3.72

$2.60

$0.50

$0.72

$0.69

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

The share price has been relatively static over the last 2 years. The 
Company has reviewed the current LTI offering of premium priced options 
and in light of the Company’s particular circumstances, has ceased further 
awards under this plan and introduced a new performance rights plan 
considered more appropriate to the Company’s circumstances.

7. 
exeCutive CoNtRACtuAl ARRANgemeNts
Remuneration arrangements for KMP are formalised in employment 
agreements. Details of these contracts are provided below:

Chief Executive Officer
The CEO, Mr Audsley, is employed under a rolling contract. 

Under the terms of the present contract:

•	 The CEO receives fixed remuneration of $650,000 per annum
•	 The CEO’s maximum STI opportunity is 40% of annual TEC
•	 The CEO is eligible to participate in the company’s LTI share option 
plan on terms determined by the board, subject to receiving the 
required or appropriate shareholder approval

•	 The CEO may resign from his position and thus terminate this contract 

by giving 6 months written notice. 

•	 The CEO’s employment may be terminated by the company by 

providing 6 months written notice. The Company may elect to provide 
6 months payment in lieu of the notice period, or a combination of 
notice and payment in lieu of notice. Payment in lieu of notice will be 
based on fixed remuneration and any short term incentive amounts for 
the prior year. 

•	 The CEO’s employment contract may be terminate by the company 

at any time without notice if serious misconduct has occurred. Where 
termination with cause occurs the CEO is only entitled to that portion 
of his remuneration contract that is fixed, and only to the date of 
termination.

•	 The Company or the CEO may terminate the contract within 6 

months of the Company ceasing to be listed on the official list of the 
Australian Securities Exchange (ASX) or a material diminution in the 
CEO’s functions, status or duties occurring. In these circumstances, the 
Company must provide 12 months notice or 12 months payment in lieu 
of notice, or a combination of the two.

The remuneration of the key management personnel are set out in Tables 
1 and 2 in section 7.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

19

e
C
N
A
m
R
o
f
R
e
P

D
e
t
A
l
e
R

l
A
t
o
t

s
t
N
e
m
y
A
P

s
t
N
e
m
y
A
P

i

N
o
At
N
m
R
e
t

i

e
R
A
h
s

D
e
s
A
B

g
N
o
l

m
R
e
t

i

s
t
f
e
N
e
B

t
s
o
P

t
N
e
m
y
o
l
P
m
e

i

s
t
f
e
N
e
B
m
R
e
t
-
t
R
o
h
s

1
1
0
2

e
n
u
J

0
3

d
e
d
n
e

r
a
e
y

e
h
t

r
o
f

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
R

:
1

l

e
b
a
T

p
u
o
r
G
e
h
t
d
n
a

y
n
a
p
m
o
C
e
h
t

f

i

o
s
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
e
d
a
p
t
s
e
h
g
h
e
v
fi
e
h
t
d
n
a

i

l

e
n
n
o
s
r
e
p
t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
m
y
e
k

f

o
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
R

%

$

$

$

$

$

s
N
o
t
P
o

i

i

*
s
t
f
e
N
e
B

s
s
e
N
e
v
g
R
o
f

i

h
s
A
C
N
o
N

-

N
A
o
l

g
N
o
l

i

e
C
v
R
e
s

)
1
(
e
v
A
e
l

$

i

N
o
t
A
u
N
N
A
R
e
P
u
s

i

*
s
t
f
e
N
e
B

$

$

-

N
o
N

h
s
A
C

h
s
A
C

s
u
N
o
B

$

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

0
0
0
,
5
7

0
0
4
,
5
6

1
4
9
,
9
6

0
0
4
,
5
6

0
0
4
,
5
6

0
0
4
,
5
6

0
0
4
,
5
6

6
3
9
,
6

%
0
.
0

7
7
8
,
8
7
4

%
1
.
9
4

2
4
9
,
9
7
2
,
1

%
1
.
9

%
0
.
1
2

%
9
.
5
1

%
2
.
0
2

%
1
.
2
3

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

0
3
6
,
4
6
7

2
9
9
,
6
1
3

6
1
4
,
8
1
5

2
0
3
,
4
2
2

2
7
1
,
3
7
3

4
3
4
,
4
4
4

9
8
7
,
7
3
2

1
2
3
,
4
2
4

8
9
9
,
3
8
5
,
4

5
7
8
,
2
6
0
,
5

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

8
5
1
,
6
6
2

1
4
2
,
7
5
1

3
8
2
,
9
8
2

2
8
6
,
2
1
7

2
8
6
,
2
1
7

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

4
5
9
,
8
6
3

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

5
9
5
,
2
1

8
6
7
,
4
7

8
8
4
,
1
3

0
2
9
,
6
8
1

4
5
9
,
8
6
3

4
5
9
,
8
6
3

3
8
0
,
4
4

3
8
0
,
4
4

8
8
6
,
1
6
2

8
8
6
,
1
6
2

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0
0
4
,
5

5
7
7
,
5

–

0
0
4
,
5

–

–

–

5
7
5
,
6
1

5
8
9

9
9
1
,
5
1

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

8
5
5

7
5
9
,
6

6
8
6
,
6

5
7
1

6
8
1

4
7
2

8
5
2
,
1

2
7
8
,
7
2

1
5
9
,
4
4

1
5
9
,
4
4

9
9
1
,
5
1

9
9
1
,
5
1

9
9
1
,
5
1

0
2
6
,
8

5
3
5
,
1
1

0
3
3
,
5

9
8
7
,
3

4
0
7
,
6

4
7
7
,
6
9

9
4
3
,
3
1
1

–

–

0
7
2
,
1

2
7
0
,
2
2

–

2
3
2
,
2
1

4
1
8
,
2
2

5
9
7
,
1

3
8
1
,
0
6

3
8
1
,
0
6

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0
0
0
,
0
6
2

0
5
7
,
8
2

5
2
4
,
2
8

0
7
3
,
5
4

3
2
5
,
7
6
1

3
0
6
,
9
1
1

–

–

–

1
7
6
,
3
0
7

1
7
6
,
3
0
7

y
R
A
l
A
s

s
e
e
f
&

R
o
f

R
e
h
t
o

P
u
o
R
g

i

i

s
e
t
t
N
e

$

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

&
y
R
A
l
A
s

R
o
f

s
e
e
f

t
N
e
R
A
P

i

y
t
t
N
e

$

0
0
0

,

5
7

0
0
0
0
6

,

6
6
1

,

4
6

0
0
4
5
6

,

0
0
0
0
6

,

0
0
4
5
6

,

0
0
4
5
6

,

6
3
9

,

6

,

0
1
0
2

t
c
O
7
d
e
c
n
e
m
m
o
c
(

h
c
o
d
r
u
M
.
L

)

0
1
0
2

v
o
N
9
d
e
t
r
a
p
e
d

)

(

2
s
n
a
v
E
.
J
P.

l
l
i

m
a
H
A

.

M
A

r
e
i
r

G
P.

l

a
e
N

.
I

a
n
n
e
K
c
M
S

.

)

n
a
m

r
i
a
h
C
y
t
u
p
e
D

(

i

l

e
d
d
S
S
M

.

.

s
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
d
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
e
-
n
o
N

)

n
a
m

r
i
a
h
C

(

O
A
y
a
s

m
a
R
.
J
P.

2
0
3
,
2
6
4

s
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
d
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
e
-
n
o
n

l

a
t
o
t

s
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
d
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
e

4
0
8

,

4
3
6

3
7
2
5
5
3

,

5
8
4
2
7
2

,

1
7
6
4
0
3

,

7
3
1
0
7
1

,

6
1
6
9
2
2

,

0
6
2
2
2
1

,

1
0
5
5
7

,

5
6
2
6
2
1

,

2
1
0
,
1
9
2
,
2

4
1
3
,
3
5
7
,
2

l

e
n
n
o
s
r
e
p
t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
m
y
e
k

r
e
h
t
o

s
d
r
a
w
d
E
D

.

)

(

4
d
o
o
W
S

.

)

0
1
0
2

c
e
D
6
d
e
c
n
e
m
m
o
c
(

y
d
e
n
n
e
K
.
L

h
t
i

m
S
G

.

)

0
1
0
2

t
p
e
S
7
2
d
e
c
n
e
m
m
o
c
(

l

r
e
k
a
W
D

.

)

0
1
0
2

c
e
D
8
d
e
t
r
a
p
e
d

(

i

s
g
n
b
b
u
t
S
P.

)

0
1
0
2
t
p
e
S
9
2
d
e
t
r
a
p
e
d

(

e
v
e
e
R
R

.

P
m
k
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
e

l

a
t
o
t

s
l
a
t
o
t

)

0
1
0
2

v
o
N
5
d
e
t
r
a
p
e
d

(

l

e
b
m
a
G
R

.

)

(

3
y
e
l
s
d
u
A

.
I

e
h
t
o
t
n
o
i
t
i
d
d
a
n

i

0
0
0
,
6
9
2
$

f

o
e
s
n
e
p
x
e
n
o
i
t
p
o
d
e
t
a
r
e
e
c
c
a
n
a
n

l

i

d
e
t
l
u
s
e
r

s
i
h
T

.
y
e
l
s
d
u
A

r

M
d
n
a

y
n
a
p
m
o
C
e
h
t
n
e
e
w
t
e
b
t
n
e
m
e
e
r
g
a

l

a
u
t
u
m
y
b

)

d
e
v
i
e
c
e
r
e
u
a
v
o
n

l

(

d
e

l
l

e
c
n
a
c
e
r
e
w
y
e
l
s
d
u
A

r

M
o
t
e
u
s
s
i

n
o
s
n
o
i
t
p
o
e
h
t

1
1
0
2
e
n
u
J

0
3
n
O

.

l

e
v
o
b
a
d
e
s
o
c
s
i
d
4
5
9
,
8
6
3
$

.

e
d
a
m
s
t
n
e
m
y
a
p
t
n
e
s
e
r
p
e
r

t
o
n
o
d
d
n
a
e
c
i
v
r
e
s

r
i
e
h
t

f

o
e
u
t
r
i
v

y
b
r
a
e
y
e
h
t
g
n
i
r
u
d
P
M
K
h
c
a
e
o
t
d
e
u
r
c
c
a

t
a
h
t

s
t
n
u
o
m
a

t
n
e
s
e
r
p
e
r

y
r
o
g
e
t
a
c

s
i
h
t

l

r
e
d
n
u
d
e
s
o
c
s
i
d
s
t
n
u
o
m
a
e
h
T

.
0
1
0
2

t
s
u
g
u
A
1
m
o
r
f

t
c
e
f
f
e
h
t
i

w
0
0
4
,
5
6
$
o
t

0
0
0
,
0
1
1
$
m
o
r
f

d
e
c
u
d
e
r
e
r
e
w
s
e
e
f

s
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
d

l

a
u
n
n
a

’
s
n
a
v
E
P.

r

M

l

l

e
u
a
V
e
b
a
t
r
o
p
e
R
p
U
d
e
s
s
o
r
G

)

1

(

)

2

(

)

3

(

*

.
y
l
n
o
1
1
Y
F
n

i

l

e
n
n
o
s
r
e
P
t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
M
y
e
K
s
a
d
e
d
u
c
n

l

i

e
r
o
f
e
r
e
h
t

s
i

d
n
a

0
1
0
2
r
e
b
o
t
c
O
1
e
v
i
t
c
e
f
f
e
n
o
i
t
a
r
g
e
t
n

I

d
n
a

t
n
e
t
n
o
C

,
r
o
t
c
e
r
i

D

f

o
n
o
i
t
i
s
o
p
e
h
t
o
t
d
e
t
o
m
o
r
p
s
a
w
d
o
o
W

r

M

)

4

(

)

I

D
E
U
N
T
N
O
C

(

s
t
N
e
m
e
g
N
A
R
R
A
l
A
u
t
C
A
R
t
N
o
C
e
v
t
u
C
e
x
e

i

.
7

)

I

D
E
U
N
T
N
O
C

(

)

i

D
e
t
D
u
A

(

i

t
R
o
P
e
R
N
o
t
A
R
e
N
u
m
e
R

T
R
O
P
E
R

’
s
R
O
T
C
E
R
D

I

20

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
e
C
N
A
m
R
o
f
R
e
P

D
e
t
A
l
e
R

l
A
t
o
t

s
t
N
e
m
y
A
P

s
t
N
e
m
y
A
P

i

N
o
At
N
m
R
e
t

i

e
R
A
h
s

D
e
s
A
B

g
N
o
l

m
R
e
t

i

s
t
f
e
N
e
B

t
s
o
P

t
N
e
m
y
o
l
P
m
e

i

s
t
f
e
N
e
B
m
R
e
t
-
t
R
o
h
s

0
1
0
2

e
n
u
J

0
3

d
e
d
n
e

r
a
e
y

e
h
t

r
o
f

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
R

:
2

l

e
b
a
T

p
u
o
r
G
e
h
t
d
n
a

y
n
a
p
m
o
C
e
h
t

f

i

o
s
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
e
d
a
p
t
s
e
h
g
h
e
v
fi
e
h
t
d
n
a

i

l

e
n
n
o
s
r
e
p
t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
m
y
e
k

f

o
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
R

T
R
O
P
E
R

’
s
R
O
T
C
E
R
D

I

%

$

$

$

$

$

s
N
o
t
P
o

i

i

*
s
t
f
e
N
e
B

s
s
e
N
e
v
g
R
o
f

i

h
s
A
C
N
o
N

-

N
A
o
l

g
N
o
l

i

e
C
v
R
e
s

)
4
(
e
v
A
e
l

$

i

N
o
t
A
u
N
N
A
R
e
P
u
s

i

*
s
t
f
e
N
e
B

$

$

-

N
o
N

h
s
A
C

h
s
A
C

s
u
N
o
B

$

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
6
.
4
3

%
2
.
5
2

%
6
.
5
2

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

%
0
.
0

0
0
0
,
5
7

0
0
4
,
5
6

5
9
5
,
5
6
1

3
0
0
,
8
1
1

0
0
4
,
5
6

0
0
4
,
5
6

7
1
3
,
6
5

5
1
1
,
1
1
6

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

4
9
7
,
4
4

3
5
4
,
4
0
8

4
2
1
,
6
8
5

7
7
9
,
7
5
4

8
7
9
,
2
2
3

0
5
8
,
8
0
3

–

–

–

–

–

–

0
3
5
,
4
0
8
,
1

6
3
8
,
9
5
0
,
1

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

2
1
2
,
4
1

8
6
7
,
4
7

6
2
5
,
5
3

0
2
9
,
6
8
1

9
1
5
,
5
1

–

–

–

7
0
2
,
9
4

0
8
3
,
0
8
2

9
5
8
,
8
2

2
6
2
,
3

8
8
3
,
8
1

4
3
0
,
5
2

1
7
4

2
8
6
,
5

6
9
6
,
1
8

9
9
2
,
4
8

7
1
4
,
2

6
4
8
,
0
1

1
6
4
,
4
1

1
6
4
,
4
1

1
6
4
,
4
1

1
6
4
,
4
1

1
6
4
,
4
1

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

3
0
6
,
2

–

0
0
4
,
5

3
7
6
,
3
1

–

0
0
4
,
5

–

–

3
0
6
,
2

3
7
4
,
4
2

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

2
0
4

8
2
6
,
1
7

7
7
6
,
8
3

–

3
6
6
,
7

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

3
0
9
,
2
0
2

0
0
0
,
0
5
1

y
R
A
l
A
s

s
e
e
f
&

R
o
f

R
e
h
t
o

P
u
o
R
g

i

i

s
e
t
t
N
e

$

–

–

–

–

–

2
2
9
,

1
4

0
0
0
,

0
5

&
y
R
A
l
A
s

R
o
f

s
e
e
f

t
N
e
R
A
P

i

y
t
t
N
e

$

0
0
0

,

5
7

0
0
0
0
6

,

0
0
0
0
1
1

,

0
0
4
5
6

,

0
0
0
0
6

,

0
0
4
5
6

,

7
1
3

,

6
5

)

n
a
m

r
i
a
h
C
y
t
u
p
e
D

(

i

l

e
d
d
S
S
M

.

.

s
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
d
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
e
-
n
o
N

)

n
a
m

r
i
a
h
C

(

O
A
y
a
s

m
a
R
.
J
P.

s
n
a
v
E
.
J
P.

l
l
i

m
a
H
A

.

M
A

r
e
i
r

G
P.

l

a
e
N

.
I

)

(

1
a
n
n
e
K
c
M
S

.

2
2
9
,
1
9

7
1
1
,
2
9
4

s
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
d
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
e
-
n
o
n

l

a
t
o
t

s
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
d
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
e

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

8
5
8
6
2

,

0
0
0
5
7
3

,

5
5
2
6
4
3

,

3
7
7
6
4
3

,

5
2
8
0
9
2

,

5
3
8
2
0
3

,

5
5
2
6
8
2

,

l

e
n
n
o
s
r
e
p
t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
m
y
e
k

r
e
h
t
o

s
d
r
a
w
d
E
D

.

i

s
g
n
b
b
u
t
S
P.

h
t
i

m
S
G

.

e
v
e
e
R
R

.

l

e
b
m
a
G
R

.

)

(

2
s
r
e
h
p
y
S
W

.

)

(

3
y
e
l
s
d
u
A

.
I

1
0
8
,
4
7
9
,
1

P
m
k
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
e

l

a
t
o
t

6
0
7
,
9
2
3
,
4

6
3
8
,
9
5
0
,
1

1
2
8
,
0
4
9
,
4

6
3
8
,
9
5
0
,
1

9
1
5
,
5
1

9
1
5
,
5
1

5
4
9
,
8
9

5
4
9
,
8
9

8
6
0
,
2
4
5

8
6
0
,
2
4
5

8
6
5
,
5
8

0
7
3
,
8
1
1

3
0
9
,
2
5
3

1
4
0
,
0
1
1

0
7
3
,
8
1
1

3
0
9
,
2
5
3

2
2
9
,
1
9

8
1
9
,
6
6
4
,
2

s
l
a
t
o
t

.

e
d
a
m
s
t
n
e
m
y
a
p
t
n
e
s
e
r
p
e
r

t
o
n
o
d
d
n
a
e
c
i
v
r
e
s

r
i
e
h
t

f

o
e
u
t
r
i
v

y
b
r
a
e
y
e
h
t
g
n
i
r
u
d
P
M
K
h
c
a
e
o
t
d
e
u
r
c
c
a

t
a
h
t

s
t
n
u
o
m
a

t
n
e
s
e
r
p
e
r

y
r
o
g
e
t
a
c

s
i
h
t

l

r
e
d
n
u
d
e
s
o
c
s
i
d
s
t
n
u
o
m
a
e
h
T

.
0
1
0
2
e
n
u
J

4
2
n
o
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
d
s
a
d
e
t
n
o
p
p
a

i

s
a
w
d
n
a

0
1
0
2
e
n
u
J
6
1
n
o
r
e
c
fi
f
O
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
E

i

f
e
h
C
s
a
p
u
o
r
G
e
h
t
h
t
i

w
d
e
c
n
e
m
m
o
c

y
e
l
s
d
u
A

r

M

.
0
1
0
2

y
a
M
0
2
n
o
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
d
a

s
a
d
n
a

0
1
0
2
h
c
r
a
M
1
3
n
o
r
e
c
fi
f
O
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
E

i

f
e
h
C
s
a
d
e
n
g
i
s
e
r

s
r
e
h
p
y
S
r

M

.
9
0
0
2

t
s
u
g
u
A
0
2
n
o
s
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
d

f

o
d
r
a
o
b
e
h
t
o
t
d
e
t
n
o
p
p
a

i

s
a
w
a
n
n
e
K
c
M

s

M

l

l

e
u
a
V
e
b
a
t
r
o
p
e
R
p
U
d
e
s
s
o
r
G

)

1

(

)

2

(

)

3

(

)

4

(

*

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

21

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORs’ REPORT

RemuNeRAtioN RePoRt (AuDiteD) (CONTINUED)

8. 

equity iNstRumeNts

Table 3: Compensation options: Granted and vested during the year (Consolidated)

gRANteD

teRms AND CoNDitioNs foR eACh gRANt

vesteD

NumBeR

gRANt
DAte

fAiR
vAlue PeR
oPtioN
At gRANt
DAte ($)

exeRCise
PRiCe PeR
oPtioN ($)

exPiRy
DAte

fiRst
exeRCise
DAte

lAst
exeRCise
DAte

NumBeR

2011 NIL

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

2010

Director Ian Audsley

5,250,000

16/06/10

$0.13

$0.90

15/06/15

16/06/11

15/06/15

total 

5,250,000

–

–

–

%

–

–

Table 4: Value of options granted, exercised, lapsed or cancelled during the year

vAlue of oPtioNs
gRANteD DuRiNg 
the yeAR
$

vAlue of oPtioNs
exeRCiseD DuRiNg 
the yeAR 
$

vAlue of oPtioNs
lAPseD DuRiNg
the yeAR
$

vAlue of oPtioNs
CANCelleD DuRiNg
the yeAR
$

RemuNeRAtioN
CoNsistiNg of
oPtioNs foR
the yeAR
%

Ian Audsley

–

–

166,250

202,704

28.8

For details on the valuation of the options, including models and assumptions used, please refer to note 28. There were no alterations to the terms and 
conditions of options granted as remuneration since their grant date. At 30 June 2011, 3,500,000 options were cancelled, by mutual agreement, between 
Mr. Audsley and the Company.

The maximum grant, which was payable assuming that all service and performance criteria were met, was equal to the number of options or rights 
granted multiplied by the fair value at the grant date. The minimum payable assuming that service and performance criteria were not met was zero.

shares issued on exercise of remuneration options
During the year ended 30 June 2011 Nil shares (2010: Nil shares) have been issued due to the exercise of options.

22

DIRECTORs’ REPORT

DiReCtoRs’ meetiNgs
The number of meetings of directors (including meetings of committees of directors) held during the year and the number of meetings attended by each 
director were as follows:

DiReCtoRs’ meetiNgs 

meetiNgs of Committees

AuDit AND Risk

RemuNeRAtioN  
AND NomiNAtioN

No of
meetiNgs
helD*

No of
meetiNgs
AtteNDeD

No of
meetiNgs
helD*

No of
meetiNgs
AtteNDeD

No of
meetiNgs
helD*

No of
meetiNgs
AtteNDeD

9

9

1

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

1

9

9

9

8

9

9

–

–

–

3

–

3

–

3

–

–

–

–

3

–

3

–

2

–

–

–

–

3

3

–

3

–

–

–

–

–

3

3

–

3

–

–

P.J.Ramsay AO

M.S.Siddle

L.K.Murdoch*

P.J.Evans 

A.A.Hamill

I.R.Neal

I.P.Grier AM

S.L.McKenna

I.C.Audsley

* 

Indicates the maximum number of meetings the director was eligible to attend during the period.

Committee memBeRshiP
Members acting on the committees of the Board during the year were:

Audit and Risk
P.J.Evans (Chairman) 
I.R.Neal  
S.L.McKenna

Remuneration and Nomination
I.P.Grier AO (Chairman)  
P.J.Evans 
A.A.Hamill

RouNDiNg 
The amounts contained in this report and in the financial report have been rounded to the nearest $1,000 (where rounding is applicable) under the option 
available to the Company under ASIC Class Order 98/0100. The Company is an entity to which the Class Order applies.

AuDitoR iNDePeNDeNCe AND NoN-AuDit seRviCes 
The Directors have received and are satisfied with the ‘Audit Independence Declaration’ provided by Prime Media Group Limited’s external auditors, 
Ernst & Young. The Audit Independence Declaration has been attached to the Directors’ Report on the following page.

NoN-AuDit seRviCes
The following non-audit services were provided by the entity’s auditor, Ernst & Young. The directors are satisfied that the provision of the non-audit 
services is compatible with the general standard of independence for auditors imposed by the Corporations Act 2001. The nature and scope of each type 
of non-audit service provided means that the auditor’s independence was not compromised.

Ernst & Young received or are due to receive the following amounts for the provision of non-audit services:

Income Tax Return & GST compliance services 

Advisory Services 

46,683

67,635

CoRPoRAte goveRNANCe 
In recognising the need for the highest standards of corporate behaviour and accountability, the directors of Prime Media Group Limited support and 
have, unless otherwise disclosed in the corporate governance statement, adhered to the principles of corporate governance. The Company’s corporate 
governance statement is contained in the following section of this report.

Signed in accordance with a resolution of the directors.

P. J. Evans 
Director

Sydney, 28 September 2011

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

23

AUDITOR’s INDEPENDENCE DECLARATION

24

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE sTATEMENT

The Board of Directors of Prime Media Group Limited is responsible for 
the corporate governance framework of the Group having regard to the 
ASX Corporate Governance Council (CGC) published guidelines as well 
as its corporate governance principles and recommendations. The Board 
guides and monitors the business and affairs of Prime Media Group 
Limited on behalf of the shareholders by whom they are elected and to 
whom they are accountable.

Management recognise their responsibility in the implementation and 
maintenance of an effective system of corporate governance.

Prime Media Group Limited’s corporate governance practices were in 
place throughout the year ended 30 June 2011 and were compliant with 
the Corporate Governance Council’s principles and recommendations 
except as noted in this statement. 

For further information on corporate governance policies adopted by 
Prime Media Group Limited, refer to our website www.primemedia.com.au

PRiNCiPle 1 – lAy soliD fouNDAtioNs  
foR mANAgemeNt AND oveRsight

BoARD ResPoNsiBilities
The relationship between the board and senior executives is critical 
to the Group’s long term success. The directors are responsible to the 
shareholders for the performance of the Group in both the short and long 
term and seek to balance sometimes competing objectives in the best 
interests of the Group as a whole. The focus of the board is to enhance 
the interest of shareholders and other key stakeholders and to ensure the 
Group is properly managed. 

The Company has an established Board charter that outlines the roles and 
responsibilities of the Board and its Committees. The charter also outlines 
the operational structure that the Company is to follow.

The board is responsible for ensuring that management’s objectives and 
activities are aligned with the expectations and risks identified by the 
board. The board has a number of mechanisms in place to ensure this is 
achieved including:

•	 board approval of a strategic plan designed to meet stakeholders’ 

needs and manage business risk;

•	 ongoing development of the strategic plan and approving initiatives 
and strategies designed to ensure the continued growth and success 
of the entity; and
implementation of budgets by management and monitoring progress 
against budget – via the establishment and reporting of both financial 
and non-financial key performance indicators.

•	

Other functions reserved to the board include:

•	 approval of the annual and half-yearly financial reports;
•	 approving and monitoring the progress of major capital expenditure, 

capital management, and acquisitions and divestures;

•	 ensuring that any significant risks that arise are identified, assessed, 

appropriately managed and monitored; and
reporting to shareholders.

•	

The board meets regularly and intends to meet at least six times each year. 
A director may at any time request the Company Secretary to convene a 
meeting of the board. On at least an annual basis the board sets aside a 
day for detailed discussions on the Group’s business strategies at which 
presentations are received from executives.

Whilst at all times the board retains full responsibility for guiding and 
monitoring the Group, it makes use of sub-committees to discharge its 
stewardship. Each Committee has adopted a formal charter setting out 
matters relevant to the composition, responsibilities and administration of 
the Committee.

The board has established the following committees:

•	 Audit and Risk Committee; and
•	 Remuneration and Nomination Committee.

All new directors are provided with a copy of the board and 
sub-committee charter documents. The charter documents are available 
on the Company website.

PeRfoRmANCe Review
The performance of executives is reviewed regularly against measurable 
and qualitative indicators. Whilst such reviews are included within the 
responsibilities of the Remuneration and Nomination Committee, the 
Board also monitors the performance of executives as part of its review 
of the performance of the Group’s business segments at each meeting 
of the board. During the reporting period, the board has conducted 
performance evaluations of key executives. The performance indicators 
against which the executives are assessed are aligned with the financial 
and non-financial objectives of the Company. Subject to applicable laws, 
the employment of executives whose performance is considered to be 
unsatisfactory may be terminated.

PRiNCiPle 2 – stRuCtuRe the BoARD to ADD vAlue

ComPositioN of the BoARD At the DAte of this RePoRt

NAme

PositioN

Paul J Ramsay AO

Non-Executive Chairman (appointed 1985)

Michael S Siddle

Non-Executive Deputy Chairman (appointed 1985)

Peter J Evans

Alex A Hamill

Ian R Neal 

Non-Executive Director (appointed 1991)

Non-Executive Director (appointed 2003)

Non-Executive Director (appointed 2008)

Ian Patrick S Grier AM Non-Executive Director (appointed 2008)

Siobhan L McKenna Non-Executive Director (appointed 20 August 2009)

Ian C Audsley

Chief Executive Officer (appointed 16 June 2010)
Executive Director (appointed 24 June 2010)

Details of the skills, experience and expertise relevant to the position of 
director held by each director are set out in the Directors’ Report.

In order to achieve the objectives of the board as stated above, the 
composition of the board is determined by applying the following 
principles:

•	 The number of board members will be a minimum of 3 members and 

a maximum of 12 members;

•	 The board consists of primarily non-executive directors;
•	 The Chairman of the board should be a non-executive director; and
•	 The directors should possess a broad range of skills, qualifications 

and experience.

BoARD iNDePeNDeNCe
The directors of the Company have an overriding duty to perform their 
duties in the best interests of the Company. Directors are required 
to declare potential conflicts of interest, interests in contracts, other 
directorships or offices held, potential related party transactions and the 
acquisition or disposal of Company shares.

Under the Board Charter, where a conflict of interest arises or a perceived 
conflict of interest exists, the director concerned declares the potential or 
perceived conflict of interest. The director is then excluded from all board 
discussions relating to the issue around which the conflict of interest has arisen.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

25

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE sTATEMENT

PRiNCiPle 2 – stRuCtuRe the BoARD to ADD vAlue
(CONTINUED)

BoARD iNDePeNDeNCe (CONTINUED)
Recommendation 2.1 of the ASX Corporate Governance Council’s 
Recommendations recommends that a majority of the board should be 
independent directors. 

The board considers an independent director to be a non-executive 
director who is not a member of management and is free of any business 
or other relationship that could materially interfere with, or reasonably be 
perceived to materially interfere with, the independent exercise of their 
judgement. The board considers the independence of its non-executive 
directors on an annual basis.

As at the date of this report, the board consists of four independent 
non-executive directors (Alexander Hamill, Ian Neal, Siobhan McKenna 
and Patrick Grier), three non-executive directors (Paul Ramsay, Michael 
Siddle, and Peter Evans) and one executive director (Ian Audsley).

Although the Company has not complied with Recommendation 2.1, the 
board considers that the non-executive directors, who do not meet the 
definition of independent director, have the management, corporate, 
financial and operational expertise and skills which are of particular 
relevance to their duties and functions as directors of the Company. 
Each of the non-independent non-executive directors have extensive 
experience in television and radio broadcasting industries having 
operated in these industries for up to 35 years.

ChAiRmAN iNDePeNDeNCe
The Board Charter sets out that the roles of Chairman and Chief Executive 
Officer are strictly separate positions and must not be exercised by the 
same individual.

The Chairman of the board is Mr Paul Ramsay AO. The board recognises 
the ASX Corporate Governance Council’s Recommendation 2.2 that 
the Chairman of the board should be an independent director. The 
board further recognises that, as Mr Ramsay is a director of a substantial 
shareholder of the Company, he does not meet the definition of 
independence. The Company has not complied with Recommendation 
2.2 because the board believes that Mr Ramsay is the most appropriate 
person to lead the board and that he brings to the board quality and 
independent judgement to all relevant issues falling within the scope 
of the role of Chairman and that the Group as a whole benefits from his 
knowledge, experience and leadership. 

Mr Ramsay has over 35 years experience in the television and media industry, 
as well as extensive experience as a director and Chairman of two Australian 
publicly listed entities, which he founded. This experience is considered to 
be invaluable to the Company in terms of industry expertise as well as the 
management and review of growth opportunities for the Company.

BoARD ComPositioN
The Company has not complied with the ASX Corporate Governance 
Council’s Recommendation 2.4 relating to the establishment of a 
Nomination Committee for the full financial year. Although the ongoing 
composition of the board is a regular discussion item at most board 
meetings, the board has acknowledged the need for a more structured 
approach towards succession planning and ongoing review of the board 
composition. In August 2011 the board reinstated the Remuneration 
committee as the ”Remuneration and Nomination Committee” and 
published on its website the revised committee charter document. The 
Company’s size does not warrant a separate nomination committee. The 
board and sub-committee make consistent and regular use of industry 
experts in the fields of new business opportunity. The skills and industry 
experience of the board as a whole is regularly reviewed and where there 
is a need for additional experience or knowledge to supplement the 
existing board, the appointment of additional board members will be 
considered. 

The appointment and removal of directors is governed by Articles 82-94 of 
the parent entity’s Constitution. Directors appointed to fill casual vacancies 
must offer themselves for re-election, and be elected, at the next following 
Annual General Meeting of the Company in order to continue in office. 
Also, at each Annual General Meeting, one third of the directors must 
resign and, in order to continue in office, must offer themselves for 
re-election and be elected at the meeting. No director shall serve more 
than three years without being a candidate for re-election.

PeRfoRmANCe evAluAtioN
The Company has not complied with the ASX Corporate Governance 
Council’s Recommendation 2.5 that it should disclose the process for 
evaluating the performance of the board, its committees and individual 
directors in the following respects:

(1)   whilst the board regularly evaluates its performance and the 

performance of its committees and the individual directors, it has not 
established formal processes for those purposes, other than review of 
the executive director’s remuneration and of non-executive directors 
fees and benefits by the Remuneration and Nomination Committee 
as appropriate. During the year there have been no appointments to 
the board other then the Company Secretary position. As part of the 
recruitment process the board nominated four board members to 
oversee the process;

(2)   it has not established or implemented formal induction procedures 
for new board appointees or new key executives because it has a 
practice that new board appointees and new key executives are given 
a comprehensive briefing on the Group’s activities and operations by 
the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer.

iNDePeNDeNt PRofessioNAl ADviCe
Each director has full access to the Company Secretary and the right of 
access to all relevant Company information. Any director who requires 
legal advice in relation to the performance of his or her duties as a director 
of the Company is permitted to seek advice, on approval of the Chairman 
and all costs reasonably incurred are reimbursable by the Company. When 
the advice is received, it is made available to the full board.

PRiNCiPle 3 – PRomote ethiCAl  
AND ResPoNsiBle DeCisioN mAkiNg
The Company strives to act with honesty and integrity and to be a 
respected and valued operator in the media sector and the communities 
in which it operates. The Board and the Company’s commitment to ethical 
and responsible decision making is reflected in the internal policies and 
procedures of the Company.

ethiCAl CoNDuCt
The Company promotes ethical and responsible behaviours for its 
directors and employees through the implementation of a Code of 
Conduct and a range of supporting internal policies and procedures that 
apply to all companies within the Group. These policies and procedures 
outline the standards of honest, ethical and law abiding behaviour 
expected by the Company.

All parties are encouraged to address problems to the attention of 
management or the board, where there may be non-compliance with 
policies and procedures governing ethical and law abiding conduct.

26

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE sTATEMENT

The Company has recently adopted the ASX Corporate Governance 
Council’s Recommendation 3.1 with the establishment of a formal Code 
of Conduct, which essentially provides documentation of a range of 
policies and procedures currently in place. The Code of Conduct is 
available to all staff and directors and is published on the Company’s 
website. The detailed policies and procedures relating to ethical and law 
abiding conduct are currently included in the employee handbook which 
is available to all employees and directors on the Company Intranet. All 
new employees are provided with a copy of the employee handbook upon 
commencement of employment and they are required to confirm that they 
have reviewed and acknowledge their understanding of the guidelines 
and policies outlined in this handbook. The employee handbook forms 
part of a policy library that addresses required conduct in relation to:

•	 Personal Behaviour;
•	 Security;
•	 Privacy;
•	 Discrimination;
•	 Workplace Safety;
•	 Conflict of Interests; and
•	 Others.

The Company also requires all employees to undertake regular online 
training covering topics that promote their understanding of ethical and 
safe work practices and conduct. As part of its ongoing commitment to 
improved corporate governance disclosure, the board has reviewed all 
policy and charter documents and subsequently published them on the 
Company website.

seCuRities tRADiNg PoliCy
Under the Company’s Securities Trading policy, a director, executive or 
staff member must not trade in any securities of the Company at any time 
when they are in possession of unpublished, price sensitive information 
(‘inside information’) in relation to those securities.

Before undertaking any trading of securities in the Company, including the 
exercise of executive share options, an executive must first obtain approval 
of the Company Secretary and a director must first obtain approval of the 
Chairman.

The Group’s Securities Trading policy outlines the following “Closed 
Periods” during which Restricted Persons and their associates are not 
permitted to trade in Prime Securities:

•	 The period from 31 December to the day on which the half year results 

are announced to the Australian Securities Exchange;

•	 The period from 30 June to the day on which the full year results are 

announced to the Australian Securities Exchange; and

•	 28 days immediately leading up to and including the day of the Annual 

General Meeting.

As required by the ASX Listing Rules, the Company notifies the ASX of any 
transaction conducted by directors in the securities of the Company.

PRiNCiPle 4 – sAfeguARD iNtegRity  
iN fiNANCiAl RePoRtiNg

AuDit AND Risk Committee
The board has established an Audit and Risk Committee whose conduct 
is governed by a formal charter of responsibilities. This charter is 
published on the Company’s website. It is the board’s responsibility to 
ensure that an effective internal control framework exists within the entity. 
This includes internal controls to deal with both the effectiveness and 
efficiency of significant business processes, the safeguarding of assets, 
the maintenance of proper accounting records, and the reliability of 
financial information as well as non-financial considerations such as the 
benchmarking of operational key performance indicators. The board has 
delegated responsibility for establishing and maintaining a framework of 
internal control and ethical standards to the Audit and Risk Committee.

The Committee also provides the board with additional assurance 
regarding the reliability of financial information for inclusion in the financial 
reports. All members of the Audit and Risk Committee are non-executive 
directors.

For details regarding the Audit and Risk Committee’s responsibilities to 
recognise and manage risk refer to principle 7.

The Audit and Risk Committee must meet at least two times each year but is 
recommended that the committee meets between 4 and 5 times each year.

Members of the Audit and Risk Committee as at the date of this report are 
as follows:

•	 Mr P.J.Evans FCA (Chairman)
•	 Ms S.L.McKenna
•	 Mr I.R.Neal

Members of the Audit and Risk Committee must be a minimum of 3 
non-executive directors and at least two members of the committee 
must be independent. Details of the qualifications of the members of 
the Audit and Risk Committee, the number of meetings of the Audit and 
Risk Committee held during the current year and the attendees at those 
meetings are set out in the Directors’ Report.

The Group’s Auditor attended the Audit and Risk Committee meetings 
and reported to the Committee at those meetings. In addition, the 
directors considered and discussed numerous audit related matters during 
the course of directors’ meetings held throughout the year and were 
in regular communication with the Company’s Auditors to discuss and 
seek advice on specific matters concerning the Company’s financial and 
reporting obligations.

The Company has not complied with the ASX Corporate Governance 
Council’s Recommendation 4.2 in the following respects:

•	

the Chairman of the Audit and Risk Committee, Mr Peter Evans, is not 
an independent director. The board, having considered the functions 
and responsibilities of the Chairman of the Audit and Risk Committee 
and the qualifications and experience of Mr Evans, believe that Mr 
Evans is the most appropriate of the directors to be the Chairman of 
the Audit and Risk Committee. Mr Evans is a Fellow of the Institute of 
Chartered Accountants, with 20 years experience in the accounting 
field, and a board member on many of the subsidiaries’ boards, giving 
him a comprehensive oversight of the risks facing the Group as whole.

Details of the qualifications of Audit and Risk Committee members are set 
out in the Directors’ Report. 

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

27

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE sTATEMENT

PRiNCiPle 5 – mAke timely AND  
BAlANCeD DisClosuRe
The board has established policies and procedures to ensure that the 
disclosure requirements of the ASX Listing Rules are adhered to. These 
policies are outlined in the Continuous Disclosure policy published on the 
Company website.

Established processes require that all disclosures relating to the release to 
the market of potentially price sensitive information must be reviewed by 
the board and approved for release. The Chairman and Chief Executive 
Officer are the only parties approved to make public comment in relation 
to the financial disclosures of the Company. 

The board has an established practice whereby all proposed ASX releases 
are circulated to the Board for review and sign off prior to the release 
being made. The board has also established a reporting process requiring 
the Company Secretary to report to the board at each board meeting of 
all disclosures made to the ASX under the Listing Rules.

The Company Secretary is responsible for all communications with the 
ASX and for educating senior management in relation to the Company’s 
continuous disclosure obligations. 

PRiNCiPle 6 – ResPeCt the Rights of shAReholDeRs
The Company acknowledges the importance of effective investor relations 
through providing clear communications and information channels for 
all shareholders. The board aims to ensure that the shareholders are 
informed of all major developments affecting the Group’s state of affairs. 
Communication of information to shareholders includes the following: 

(1)   The annual report is available to all shareholders. The Board ensures 

that the annual report includes relevant information about the 
operations of the Group during the year, changes in the state of affairs 
of the Group and details of future developments, in addition to the 
other disclosures required by the Corporations Act 2001; 

(2)   The half-yearly report contains summarised financial information and 
a review of the operations of the Group during the period. Half-year 
financial statements prepared in accordance with the requirements of 
the Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001 are lodged 
with the Australian Securities and Investments Commission and 
the ASX. The financial statements are sent to any shareholder who 
requests them;

(3)   The Company ensures that all price sensitive information is disclosed 

to the ASX in accordance with the continuous disclosure requirements 
of the Corporations Act 2001 and the ASX Listing Rules; 

(4)  Notices of all general meetings are sent to all shareholders; and

(5)   The Company is constantly looking at ways of making its 

communications more effective and has been undergoing an active 
review of the information it publishes on its website. The Company has 
developed a separate corporate website, www.primemedia.com.au. 
The Company aims to ensure that all material releases to the ASX are 
also published on the Company’s website in a timely manner after the 
release to the ASX has been confirmed.

ANNuAl geNeRAl meetiNgs
The board encourages full participation of shareholders at the Annual 
General Meeting to ensure a high level of accountability and identification 
with the Group’s strategy and goals. 

The shareholders are requested to vote on the appointment of directors, 
the Remuneration Report, the granting of securities to directors and 
changes to the Constitution. A copy of the Constitution is available to any 
shareholder who requests it.

In accordance with the Corporations Act 2001, the Company provides 
its Auditors with a notice of its Annual General Meeting and makes time 
available within this meeting for the Auditor to address the meeting 
if required and for members of the Company to ask questions of the 
Auditors in this forum.

PRiNCiPle 7 – ReCogNise AND mANAge Risk
The board oversees the establishment, implementation and review 
of the Group’s risk management practices. The Group has continued 
its approach to proactive risk management. The identification and 
effective management of risk, including calculated risk-taking is viewed 
as an essential part of the Company’s approach to creating long-term 
shareholder value. To facilitate the execution of the board’s responsibilities 
to manage risk, a separate Audit and Risk subcommittee of the board has 
been established. 

The Audit and Risk Committee is charged with the responsibility of 
overseeing an annual assessment of the effectiveness of risk management 
and internal compliance and control. The tasks of undertaking and 
assessing risk management and internal control effectiveness are 
delegated to management through the Chief Executive Officer, including 
responsibility for the day to day implementation of the Company’s risk 
management and internal control systems. Management reports to the 
Audit and Risk Committee and the board on the Company’s key risks and 
the extent to which it believes these risks are being adequately managed. 
The reporting on risk management is a standard agenda item at all regular 
board meetings.

Risk management focuses on strategic, financial, operational and legal/
compliance risks through the following compliance and control systems: 

•	

•	

•	

requiring management to supply comprehensive financial and 
operational reports, which specifically highlight variances and areas of 
potential exposure. Regular reports to the board include reports from 
the heads of the Group’s business segments; 
requiring actual results to be reported against budgets approved 
by the directors and revised forecasts for the year to be prepared 
regularly. The Company has a comprehensive budgeting system with 
an annual budget approved by the directors. Actual results against 
budget and revised forecasts for the year are prepared and supplied to 
the Board at least monthly;
requiring board approval for significant capital expenditure and 
expenditure on revenue account. Procedures adopted in this regard 
include annual budgets, detailed appraisal and review prior to major 
expenditure or commitments, and comprehensive due diligence 
requirements where businesses are being acquired or strategic 
alliances are being entered into; 

28

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE sTATEMENT

•	 monitoring and reviewing continuous disclosure (refer to comments 

•	

•	

under Principle 5 relating to disclosure);
instigating an action plan or policy as soon as a risk is identified and 
monitoring its implementation; 
implementing occupational health and safety strategies and 
management systems (including monitoring and review procedures) in 
all business segments to achieve high standards of performance and 
compliance with regulations;

•	 promoting risk identification and management within the Group as a 

•	

significant obligation of every employee; and
including in the responsibilities of the roles of Chief Executive Officer 
and Company Secretary, identification of risks affecting each business 
segment and the development of strategies to minimise those risks.

The Company does not have an internal audit function. The board believe 
that the size and nature of the Company’s operations currently do not 
warrant a separate internal audit function.

For the purposes of assisting investors to understand better the nature 
of the risks faced by the Company, the board has prepared a list of 
operational risks as part of the Principle 7 disclosures. The board notes 
however that this does not necessarily represent an exhaustive list and that 
it may be subject to change based on underlying market events:

•	 fluctuations in consumer demand that impact advertising market 

•	
•	

revenues;
impact of new media technologies;
the occurrence of force majeure events that may affect our significant 
suppliers;
increasing costs of operations, including labour costs;

•	
•	 changed operating, market or regulatory environment as a result of 

changes in government media policy.

Underpinning these efforts is a comprehensive set of policies and 
procedures directed towards achieving the following objectives in relation 
to the requirements of Principle 7:

•	 effectiveness and efficiency in the use of the Company’s resources;
•	 compliance with applicable laws and regulations;
•	 preparation of reliable published financial information.

Ceo AND Cfo CeRtifiCAtioN
In accordance with section 295A of the Corporations Act 2001, the Chief 
Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer have provided a written 
statement to the board that :

•	 Their view provided on the Company’s financial report is founded on a 
sound system of risk management and internal compliance and control 
which implements the financial policies adopted by the board;

•	 The Company’s risk management and internal compliance and control 

system is operating effectively in all material respects.

The board agrees with the views of the ASX on this matter and notes that 
due to its nature, internal control assurance from the CEO and CFO can 
only be reasonable rather than absolute. This is due to such factors as the 
need for judgement, the use of testing on a sample basis, the inherent 
limitations in internal control and because much of the evidence available 
is persuasive rather than conclusive and therefore is not and cannot be 
designed to detect all weaknesses in control procedures.

PRiNCiPle 8 – RemuNeRAte fAiRly  
AND ResPoNsiBly

RemuNeRAtioN AND NomiNAtioN Committee
The Company has established a Remuneration and Nomination 
Committee. The Committee is governed by an established charter that is 
published on the Company website.

Members of the Remuneration and Nomination Committee as at the date 
of this report are as follows:

•	 Mr I.P.Grier (Chairman)
•	 Mr P.J.Evans 
•	 Mr A.A.Hamill

Details of the number of meetings of the Remuneration and Nomination 
Committee held during the year and the attendees at those meetings are 
set out in the Directors’ Report.

The Remuneration and Nomination Committee reviews the remuneration 
arrangements and employment conditions applicable to executives 
and any executive directors. In making these determinations, regard 
is had to comparable industry or professional salary levels, and to the 
specific performance of the individuals concerned. The Company clearly 
distinguishes the structure of non-executive directors’ remuneration 
(paid in the form of a fixed fee) and that of any executive director and 
executives.

The remuneration of managers and staff other than executives and 
executive directors is within the authority of the Chief Executive Officer. 
The Chief Executive Officer has discretion in regard to the remuneration 
of individual managers subject to the proviso that the overall level of 
remuneration is within budget guidelines as approved by the board prior 
to preparation of the annual budget.

The Remuneration and Nomination Committee regularly reviews the 
effectiveness of the long term incentive schemes to ensure that the 
structure remains effective. Recommendations in respect of the granting 
of incentives under any long term incentive schemes are made by the 
Remuneration and Nomination Committee to the board. In accordance 
with the Listing Rules of the Australian Securities Exchange, options issued 
to executive directors are required to be approved by shareholders in 
general meeting.

A full discussion of the Company’s remuneration philosophy and 
framework and the remuneration received by directors and executives 
during the year is set out in the Remuneration Report, which comprises 
part of the Directors’ Report. 

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

29

CONsOLIDATED sTATEMENT OF COMPREHENsIVE INCOME
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

CoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs

Revenue and other income

Revenue from services

Interest income

Other income

total revenue and other income

Cost of sales

gross profit

Broadcasting and transmission expenses

Marketing expenses

Administration expenses

Depreciation and amortisation expenses

Finance Costs

Share of associate losses

Profit from continuing operations before specific items and income tax

Specific items

Gain from MtM derivative financial instruments

Fair value movement in receivable – deferred contingent consideration

Transfer of foreign currency translation reserve to profit and loss

Gain from disposal of available for sale financial assets

Impairment expense – intangible assets (radio broadcast licences)

Impairment expense – loan to associates

Impairment expense – television program rights

Restructuring expense

CEO termination expenses

One off increase to employee entitlements resulting from award change

destra administration costs

Redundancies

PRofit fRom CoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs BefoRe iNCome tAx

Income tax expense

PRofit/(loss) fRom CoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs AfteR tAx

DisCoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs

loss fRom DisCoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs AfteR tAx

Net PRofit/(loss) AfteR tAx 

Notes

4(A)

4(A)

4(A)

4(B)

5(C)

6(B)

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

250,030

231,365

420

6,548

256,998

(127,613)

129,385

(49,040)

(2,529)

(17,573)

(10,175)

(11,548)

(586)

37,934

1,333

1,181

(995)

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(198)

39,255

(11,067)

28,188

330

4,819

236,514

(118,503)

118,011

(44,526)

(1,742)

(19,370)

(10,224)

(11,242)

(1,601)

29,306

1,518

–

–

921

(12,529)

(4,384)

(1,302)

(2,207)

(1,871)

(626)

(226)

(718)

7,882

(10,218)

(2,336)

(1,022)

27,166

(52,208)

(54,544)

30

CONsOLIDATED sTATEMENT OF COMPREHENsIVE INCOME
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

other comprehensive income

Transfer of foreign currency translation reserve to profit and loss

Foreign currency translation differences for the period recognised directly in equity

otheR ComPReheNsive iNCome foR the PeRioD AfteR tAx

totAl ComPReheNsive iNCome/(loss) AfteR tAx

Net Profit/(loss) for the period is attributable to:

Non-controlling interest

Owners of the Parent

total comprehensive income/(loss) for the period is attributable to:

Non-controlling interest

Owners of the Parent

Basic earnings per share (cents per share)

profit/(loss) for the year 

profit/(loss) from continuing operations 

profit from continuing operations before significant items

Diluted earnings per share (cents per share)

profit/(loss) for the year 

Notes

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

995

(201)

794

2010
$’000

1,032

218

1,250

27,960

(53,294)

–

27,166

27,166

–

27,960

27,960

7.4

7.7

7.4

7.4

(85)

(54,459)

(54,544)

(85)

(53,209)

(53,294)

(15.0)

(0.6)

4.9

(15.0)

7

7

7

7

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

31

CONsOLIDATED sTATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POsITION
As AT 30 JUNE 2011

Notes

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

Assets

Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade and other receivables

Intangible assets

Other assets

Current tax assets

Assets of disposal group classified as held for sale

total Current Assets 

Non-Current Assets

Receivables

Investments in associates

Investment in Available-for-sale financial assets

Property, plant and equipment

Deferred tax assets

Intangible assets and goodwill

Other assets

total Non-Current Assets 

totAl Assets

liABilities

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings

Current tax liabilities

Provisions

Derivative financial instruments

9

10

16

11

5

6(C)

10

12

14

15

5

16

11

17

18

5

19

24

Liabilities directly associated with assets classified as held for sale

6(C)

17

18

19

20

21

21

total Current liabilities

Non-Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings

Provisions

total Non-Current liabilities

totAl liABilities

Net Assets

equity

equity attributable to equity holders of the parent interest

Contributed equity

Reserves

Accumulated losses

Parent interests

totAl equity

32

19,374

54,387

616

2,001

–

76,378

–

76,378

672

–

5,138

54,334

8,052

224,694

2,332

295,222

371,600

5,664

51,514

832

2,462

57

60,529

39,888

100,417

317

80

3,137

56,308

12,093

225,284

1,561

298,780

399,197

57,584

60,406

627

3,077

2,255

1,687

65,230

–

65,230

–

152,823

434

153,257

218,487

153,113

408

–

8,102

3,020

71,936

24,162

96,098

68

165,201

520

165,789

261,887

137,310

310,262

(78)

(157,071)

153,113

153,113

310,262

(1,537)

(171,415)

137,310

137,310

l
A
t
o
t

0
0
0
’
$

6
6
1
,
7
2

0
1
3
,
7
3
1

4
9
7

0
6
9
,
7
2

5
6
6

)
2
2
8
,
2
1
(

3
1
1
,
3
5
1

l
A
t
o
t

0
0
0
’
$

)
4
4
5
,
4
5
(

8
3
3
,
7
9
1

0
5
2
,
1

)
4
9
2
,
3
5
(

0
9
8
,
1

6
1

)
5
2
6
(

4
5
3
,
3

)
4
5
3
,
3
(

)
5
1
0
,
8
(

0
1
3
,
7
3
1

-

N
o
N

g
N
i
l
l
o
R
t
N
o
C

t
s
e
R
e
t
N

i

0
0
0
’
$

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

-

N
o
N

g
N
i
l
l
o
R
t
N
o
C

t
s
e
R
e
t
N

i

0
0
0
’
$

)
5
8
(

2
5
6

–

)
5
8
(

–

–

–

–

–

–

)
7
6
5
(

l
A
t
o
t

t
N
e
R
A
P

i

y
t
t
N
e

t
s
e
R
e
t
N

i

0
0
0
’
$

6
6
1
,
7
2

0
1
3
,
7
3
1

4
9
7

0
6
9
,
7
2

5
6
6

)
2
2
8
,
2
1
(

3
1
1
,
3
5
1

l
A
t
o
t

t
N
e
R
A
P

i

y
t
t
N
e

t
s
e
R
e
t
N

i

0
0
0
’
$

)
9
5
4
,
4
5
(

6
8
6
,
6
9
1

0
5
2
,
1

)
9
0
2
,
3
5
(

0
9
8
,
1

6
1

)
5
2
6
(

4
5
3
,
3

)
7
8
7
,
2
(

)
5
1
0
,
8
(

0
1
3
,
7
3
1

l
A
R
e
N
e
g

e
v
R
e
s
e
R

0
0
0
’
$

)
7
8
7
,
2
(

–

–

–

–

–

)
7
8
7
,
2
(

i

N
g
e
R
o
f

y
C
N
e
R
R
u
C

i

N
o
t
A
l
s
N
A
R
t

e
v
R
e
s
e
R

0
0
0
’
$

e
e
y
o
l
P
m
e

i

s
t
f
e
N
e
B

e
v
R
e
s
e
R

0
0
0
’
$

D
e
t
A
l
u
m
u
C
C
A

s
e
s
s
o
l

0
0
0
’
$

D
e
u
s
s

i

i

l
A
t
P
A
C

0
0
0
’
$

)
4
9
7
(

–

4
9
7

4
9
7

–

–

–

–

–

–

4
4
0
,
2

–

5
6
6

9
0
7
,
2

6
6
1
,
7
2

)
5
1
4
,
1
7
1
(

–

6
6
1
,
7
2

–

)
2
2
8
,
2
1
(

)
1
7
0
,
7
5
1
(

–

–

–

–

–

2
6
2
,
0
1
3

2
6
2
,
0
1
3

l
A
R
e
N
e
g

e
v
R
e
s
e
R

0
0
0
’
$

i

N
g
e
R
o
f

y
C
N
e
R
R
u
C

i

N
o
t
A
l
s
N
A
R
t

e
v
R
e
s
e
R

0
0
0
’
$

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

)
7
8
7
,
2
(

)
7
8
7
,
2
(

)
4
4
0
,
2
(

–

0
5
2
,
1

0
5
2
,
1

–

–

–

–

–

–

e
e
y
o
l
P
m
e

i

s
t
f
e
N
e
B

e
v
R
e
s
e
R

0
0
0
’
$

8
2
0
,
2

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

6
1

D
e
t
A
l
u
m
u
C
C
A

s
e
s
s
o
l

0
0
0
’
$

D
e
u
s
s

i

i

l
A
t
P
A
C

0
0
0
’
$

)
9
5
4
,
4
5
(

)
1
4
9
,
8
0
1
(

–

)
9
5
4
,
4
5
(

–

–

–

–

–

)
5
1
0
,
8
(

)
5
1
4
,
1
7
1
(

–

–

–

3
4
6
,
5
0
3

0
9
8
,
1

–

)
5
2
6
(

4
5
3
,
3

–

–

2
6
2
,
0
1
3

)
4
9
7
(

4
4
0
,
2

d
o
i
r
e
p
e
h
t

r
o
f

e
s
n
e
p
x
e
d
n
a

e
m
o
c
n

i

e
v
i
s
n
e
h
e
r
p
m
o
c

l

a
t
o
t

e
m
o
c
n

i

e
v
i
s
n
e
h
e
r
p
m
o
c

r
e
h
t
O

d
o
i
r
e
p
e
h
t

r
o

f

t
fi
o
r
P

0
1
0
2

y
l
u
J

1

t
A

1
1
0
2

E
N
U
J

0
3
D
E
D
N
E

R
A
E
Y

l

:
s
r
e
d
o
h
y
t
i
u
q
e
s
a
y
t
i
c
a
p
a
c

r
i
e
h
t
n

i

l

s
r
e
d
o
h
y
t
i
u
q
e
h
t
i

w
s
n
o
i
t
c
a
s
n
a
r
t

d
o
i
r
e
p
e
h
t

r
o
f

e
s
n
e
p
x
e
d
n
a

e
m
o
c
n

i

e
v
i
s
n
e
h
e
r
p
m
o
c

l

a
t
o
t

e
m
o
c
n

i

e
v
i
s
n
e
h
e
r
p
m
o
c

r
e
h
t
O

d
o
i
r
e
p
e
h
t

r
o

f

t
fi
o
r
P

9
0
0
2

y
l
u
J

1

t
A

s
e
r
a
h
s

i

y
r
a
n
d
r
o
n
o
s
d
n
e
d
i
v
i
D

s
t
n
e
m
y
a
p
d
e
s
a
b
e
r
a
h
S

1
1
0
2
e
n
u
J

0
3
t
A

0
1
0
2

E
N
U
J

0
3
D
E
D
N
E

R
A
E
Y

l

:
s
r
e
d
o
h
y
t
i
u
q
e
s
a
y
t
i
c
a
p
a
c

r
i
e
h
t
n

i

l

s
r
e
d
o
h
y
t
i
u
q
e
h
t
i

w
s
n
o
i
t
c
a
s
n
a
r
t

g
n

i
l
l

o
r
t
n
o
c
-
n
o
n
f

o
n
o
i
t
i
s
i
u
q
c
a

r
o

f
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
d
i
s
n
o
c

s
a
d
e
u
s
s
i

s
e
r
a
h
S

s
n
o
i
t
c
a
s
n
a
r
t
d
e
l
t
t
e
s

y
t
i
u
q
e
f

o
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
d
i
s
n
o
c

s
a
d
e
u
s
s
i

s
e
r
a
h
S

s
e
i
t
i
t
n
e
d
e

l
l

o
r
t
n
o
c
n

i

d
e
r
i
u
q
c
a

s
t
s
e
r
e
t
n

i

g
n

i
l
l

o
r
t
n
o
c
-
n
o
N

t
s
e
r
e
t
n

i

g
n

i
l
l

o
r
t
n
o
c
-
n
o
n
g
n
i
r
i
u
q
c
a

f

o
s
t
s
o
c
n
o
i
t
c
a
s
n
a
r
T

s
e
r
a
h
s

i

y
r
a
n
d
r
o
n
o
s
d
n
e
d
i
v
i
D

0
1
0
2
e
n
u
J

0
3
t
A

s
e
i
t
i
t
n
e
d
e

l
l

o
r
t
n
o
c
n

i

t
s
e
r
e
t
n

i

s
t
n
e
m
y
a
p
d
e
s
a
b
e
r
a
h
S

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

33

I

Y
T
U
q
E
N

I

s
E
G
N
A
H
C
F
O
T
N
E
M
E
T
A
T
s
D
E
T
A
D
I
L
O
s
N
O
C

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONsOLIDATED sTATEMENT OF CAsH FLOws
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

Notes

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

Cash flows from operating activities

Receipts from customers (inclusive of GST)

Payments to suppliers and employees (inclusive of GST)

Interest received

Borrowing costs paid

Income tax refunds received

Income tax paid 

Net cash flows from operating activities

9(A)

Cash flows from investing activities

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

Proceeds from sale of available-for-sale financial assets

Proceeds from sale of business operations

Payment of deferred settlement for acquisition of subsidiaries and related business assets

290,607

(239,315)

504

(13,659)

1,170

(4,888)

34,419

1,049

(9,727)

34

20,508

(1,250)

(154)

(300)

10,160

–

76,000

(1,110)

(92,933)

(12,822)

(30,865)

13,714

5,664

(4)

301,726

(254,349)

355

(12,842)

4,577

(6,301)

33,166

45

(26,259)

1,998

–

(1,339)

–

(1,717)

(27,272)

(159)

92,000

(1,998)

(88,838)

(8,015)

(7,010)

(1,116)

6,669

111

5,664

9

19,374

Loan funds to other parties

Loan funds to related entities

Net cash flows from/(used in) investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

Cost of issue of ordinary shares

Proceeds from borrowings 

Finance lease liability payments

Repayments of borrowings 

Dividends paid

Net cash flows used in financing activities

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

Net foreign exchange differences

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

34

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

1 CoRPoRAte iNfoRmAtioN

The consolidated financial report of Prime Media Group Limited (the 
“Company”) for the year ended 30 June 2011 was authorised for issue in 
accordance with a resolution of the directors on 28 September 2011.

Prime Media Group Limited is a company limited by shares incorporated 
in Australia whose shares are publicly traded on the Australian Securities 
Exchange.

The nature of the operations and principal activities of the Group are 
described in the Directors’ Report.

2

summARy of sigNifiCANt 
ACCouNtiNg PoliCies

Basis of consolidation
Business combinations
Significant accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions

Basis of preparation
Statement of Compliance with IFRS

tABle of CoNteNts
(A) 
(B) 
(C)  New Accounting Standards and Interpretations
(D) 
(E) 
(F) 
(G)  Operating segments 
Foreign currency translation
(H) 
Cash and cash equivalents
(I) 
Trade and other receivables
(J) 
Property, plant and equipment
(K) 
Goodwill and intangible assets
(L) 
Investments and other financial assets
(M) 
Investment in associates
(N) 
Trade and other payables
(O) 
Interest-bearing loans and borrowings
(P) 
Provisions and employee leave benefits
(Q) 
Share-based payment transactions
(R) 
Leases
(S) 
Revenue recognition
(T) 
Government grants
(U) 
Income tax
(V) 
(W)  Other taxes
(X) 
(Y) 
(Z) 
(AA) 

Derivative financial instruments and hedging
Derecognition of financial assets and financial liabilities
Impairment of financial assets
Impairment of non-financial assets other than goodwill and 
indefinite life intangibles

(BB)  Contributed equity
(CC)  Earnings per share
(DD)  Non-current assets and disposal groups held for resale and 

discontinued operations

(A)  BAsis of PRePARAtioN
The financial report is a general-purpose financial report, which has been 
prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Corporations Act 2001, 
Australian Accounting Standards and other authoritative pronouncements 
from the Australian Accounting Standards Board. The financial report has 
been prepared on a historical cost basis, except for derivative financial 
instruments, land and buildings, available-for-sale investments, and 
investments in associates that have been measured at fair value.

The financial report is presented in Australian dollars and all values are 
rounded to the nearest thousand dollars ($’000) unless otherwise stated 
under the option available to the Company under ASIC Class order 
98/0100. The Company is an entity to which the class order applies.

(B)  stAtemeNt of ComPliANCe with ifRs
The financial report complies with Australian Accounting Standards 
and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the 
International Accounting Standards Board.

(C) 

 New ACCouNtiNg stANDARDs AND 
iNteRPRetAtioNs

ChANges iN ACCouNtiNg PoliCy AND DisClosuRes. 
The accounting policies adopted are consistent with those of the previous 
financial year except as follows: The Group has adopted the following new 
and amended Australian Accounting Standards and AASB interpretations 
as of 1 July 2010:

•	 AASB 2009-8 Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards  

– Group Cash-settled Share-based Payment Transactions [AASB 2] 
effective 1 July 2010

•	 AASB 2009-5 Further Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards 
arising from the Annual Improvements Project [AASB 5, 8, 101, 107, 
117, 118, 136 & 139] effective 1 July 2010

•	 AASB 2010-3 Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards arising 

from the Annual Improvements Project effective 1 July 2010

When the adoption of the Standard or Interpretation is deemed to have 
an impact on the financial statements or performance of the Group, its 
impact is described below:

AAsB 2009-8 Amendments to Australian Accounting standards  
– group Cash-settled share-based Payment transactions

The amendments clarify the scope of AASB 2 Share-based Payment 
by requiring an entity that receives goods or services in a share-based 
payment arrangement to account for those goods or services no matter 
which entity in the group settles the transaction, and no matter whether the 
transaction is settled in shares or cash. The amendments incorporate the 
requirements previously included in Interpretation 8 Scope of AASB 2 and 
Interpretation 11 AASB 2 – Group and Treasury Share Transactions. It did 
not have an impact on the financial position or performance of the Group.

ANNuAl imPRovemeNts PRoJeCt
In May 2009 and June 2010 the AASB issued omnibus or amendments 
to its Standards as part of the Annual Improvements Project, primarily 
with a view to removing inconsistencies and clarifying wording. There 
are separate transitional provisions and application dates for each 
amendment. The adoption of the following amendments resulted in 
changes to accounting policies but did not have any impact on the 
financial position or performance of the Group.

•	 AASB 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued 

Operations: clarifies that the disclosures required in respect of 
non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale 
or discontinued operations are only those set out in AASB 5. The 
disclosure requirements of other Accounting Standards only apply 
if specifically required for such non-current assets or discontinued 
operations. As a result of this amendment, the Group amended its 
disclosures in note 6.

•	 AASB 8 Operating Segments: clarifies that segment assets and 

liabilities need only be reported when those assets and liabilities are 
included in measures that are used by the chief operating decision 
maker. The Group has disclosed segment assets by operating segment 
as this information is reviewed by the chief operation decision maker. 
The Group does not allocate its liabilities by operating segment for 
the chief operating decision maker and has therefore not allocated 
these liabilities to operating segments in the disclosures in Note 34 
Operating Segments. 

•	 AASB 107 Statement of Cash Flows: states that only expenditure that 
results in recognising an asset can be classified as a cash flow from 
investing activities. The amendment will not have any impact on the 
presentation of the statement of cash flows.

•	 AASB 136 Impairment of Assets: the amendment also clarified that the 
largest unit permitted for allocating goodwill, acquired in a business 
combination, is the operating segment as defined in AASB 8 before 
aggregation for reporting purposes. The amendment has no impact 
on the Group as all goodwill held by the Group is allocated with the 
operating segments as defined in AASB 8.

•	 AASB Interpretation 17 Distribution of Non-cash Assets to Owners: 

this interpretation provides guidance on accounting for arrangements 
whereby an entity distributes non-cash assets to shareholders either 
as a distribution of reserves or as dividends. The interpretation has no 
effect on either the financial position or performance of the Group.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

35

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

2

summARy of sigNifiCANt ACCouNtiNg PoliCies (CONTINUED)

Australian Accounting Standards and Interpretations that have recently been issued or amended, but are not yet effective, have not been adopted by the 
Group for the annual reporting period ended 30 June 2011. These are outlined in the table below.

APPliCAtioN 
DAte of 
stANDARD

imPACt oN gRouP 
fiNANCiAl RePoRt

APPliCAtioN 
DAte foR 
gRouP

1 January 2013 The Group has not yet 

1 July 2013

determined the full 
extent of the impact of 
the amendments, but 
does not believe it will 
have a material impact

RefeReNCe

title

summARy

AASB 9

Financial 
Instruments

AASB 9 includes requirements for the 
classification and measurement of financial 
assets resulting from the first part of 
Phase 1 of the IASB’s project to replace 
IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition 
and Measurement (AASB 139 Financial 
Instruments: Recognition and Measurement). 

These requirements improve and simplify the 
approach for classification and measurement 
of financial assets compared with the 
requirements of AASB 139. The main changes 
from AASB 139 are described below. 

(a)  Financial assets are classified based on 
(1) the objective of the entity’s business 
model for managing the financial assets; 
(2) the characteristics of the contractual 
cash flows. This replaces the numerous 
categories of financial assets in AASB 139, 
each of which had its own classification 
criteria. 

(b)  AASB 9 allows an irrevocable election 
on initial recognition to present gains 
and losses on investments in equity 
instruments that are not held for trading in 
other comprehensive income. Dividends 
in respect of these investments that are a 
return on investment can be recognised in 
profit or loss and there is no impairment or 
recycling on disposal of the instrument. 

Financial assets can be designated and 
measured at fair value through profit or loss 
at initial recognition if doing so eliminates 
or significantly reduces a measurement 
or recognition inconsistency that would 
arise from measuring assets or liabilities, or 
recognising the gains and losses on them, on 
different bases.

AASB 2009-11 Amendments 
to Australian 
Accounting 
Standards arising 
from AASB 9 
[AASB 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 
101, 102, 108, 112, 
118, 121, 127, 128, 
131, 132, 136, 139, 
1023 & 1038 and 
Interpretations 10 
& 12]

•	 These amendments arise from the 

1 January 2013 The Group has not yet 

1 July 2013

issuance of AASB 9 Financial Instruments 
that sets out requirements for the 
classification and measurement of financial 
assets. The requirements in AASB 9 form 
part of the first phase of the International 
Accounting Standards Board’s project 
to replace IAS 39 Financial Instruments: 
Recognition and Measurement.

•	 This Standard shall be applied when AASB 

9 is applied.

determined the full 
extent of the impact of 
the amendments, but 
does not believe it will 
have a material impact

36

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

RefeReNCe

title

summARy

AASB 124 
(Revised)

Related Party 
Disclosures 

(December 2009)

AASB 2009-12 Amendments 
to Australian 
Accounting 
Standards 
[AASBs 5, 8, 108, 
110, 112, 119, 
133, 137, 139, 
1023 & 1031 and 
Interpretations 2, 4, 
16, 1039 & 1052]

AASB 1054

Australian 
Additional 
Disclosures

The revised AASB 124 simplifies the definition 
of a related party, clarifying its intended 
meaning and eliminating inconsistencies from 
the definition, including:

(a)  The definition now identifies a subsidiary 

and an associate with the same investor as 
related parties of each other

(b)  Entities significantly influenced by one 

person and entities significantly influenced 
by a close member of the family of that 
person are no longer related parties of 
each other 

(c)  The definition now identifies that, 

whenever a person or entity has both joint 
control over a second entity and joint 
control or significant influence over a third 
party, the second and third entities are 
related to each other

A partial exemption is also provided from 
the disclosure requirements for government-
related entities.  Entities that are related 
by virtue of being controlled by the same 
government can provide reduced related 
party disclosures. 

This amendment makes numerous editorial 
changes to a range of Australian Accounting 
Standards and Interpretations.

In particular, it amends AASB 8 Operating 
Segments to require an entity to exercise 
judgement in assessing whether a 
government and entities known to be 
under the control of that government 
are considered a single customer for the 
purposes of certain operating segment 
disclosures.  It also makes numerous editorial 
amendments to a range of Australian 
Accounting Standards and Interpretations, 
including amendments to reflect changes 
made to the text of IFRS by the IASB.

This standard is as a consequence of phase 
1 of the joint Trans-Tasman Convergence 
project of the AASB and FRSB.

This standard relocates all Australian specific 
disclosures from other standards to one place 
and revises disclosures in the following areas:

(a)  Compliance with Australian Accounting 

Standards

(b)  The statutory basis or reporting framework 

for financial statements

(c)  Whether the financial statements are 
general purpose or special purpose

(d)  Audit fees
(e)  Imputation credits

APPliCAtioN 
DAte of 
stANDARD

imPACt oN gRouP 
fiNANCiAl RePoRt

APPliCAtioN 
DAte foR 
gRouP

1 January 2011 The Group has not yet 

1 July 2011

determined the full 
extent of the impact of 
the amendments, but 
does not believe it will 
have a material impact

1 January 2011 The Group has not yet 

1 July 2011

determined the full 
extent of the impact of 
the amendments, but 
does not believe it will 
have a material impact

1 July 2011

1 July 2011

The Group has not yet 
determined the full 
extent of the impact of 
the amendments, but 
does not believe it will 
have a material impact

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

37

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

2

summARy of sigNifiCANt ACCouNtiNg PoliCies (CONTINUED)

APPliCAtioN 
DAte of 
stANDARD

imPACt oN gRouP 
fiNANCiAl RePoRt

APPliCAtioN 
DAte foR 
gRouP

1 January 2011 The Group has not yet 

1 July 2011

determined the full 
extent of the impact of 
the amendments, but 
does not believe it will 
have a material impact

1 January 2011 The Group has not yet 

1 July 2011

determined the full 
extent of the impact of 
the amendments, but 
does not believe it will 
have a material impact

1 July 2011

1 July 2011

The Group has not yet 
determined the full 
extent of the impact of 
the amendments, but 
does not believe it will 
have a material impact

1 January 2013 The Group has not yet 

1 July 2013

determined the full 
extent of the impact of 
the amendments, but 
does not believe it will 
have a material impact

RefeReNCe

title

summARy

AASB 2010-4

Further 
Amendments 
to Australian 
Accounting 
Standards arising 
from the Annual 
Improvements 
Project [AASB 1, 
AASB 7, AASB 
101, AASB 134 and 
Interpretation 13]

AASB 2010-5

AASB 2010-6

AASB 2010-7

Amendments 
to Australian 
Accounting 
Standards

[AASB 1, 3, 4, 5, 
101, 107, 112, 118, 
119, 121, 132, 133, 
134, 137, 139, 140, 
1023 & 1038 and 
Interpretations 112, 
115, 127, 132 & 
1042]

Amendments 
to Australian 
Accounting 
Standards – 
Disclosures on 
Transfers of Financial 
Assets [AASB 1 & 
AASB 7]

Amendments 
to Australian 
Accounting 
Standards arising 
from AASB 9 
(December 2010)

[AASB 1, 3, 4, 5, 
7, 101, 102, 108, 
112, 118, 120, 121, 
127, 128, 131, 132, 
136, 137, 139, 
1023, & 1038 and 
interpretations 2, 5, 
10, 12, 19 & 127]

Emphasises the interaction between 
quantitative and qualitative AASB 7 
disclosures and the nature and extent of risks 
associated with financial instruments.

Clarifies that an entity will present an analysis 
of other comprehensive income for each 
component of equity, either in the statement 
of changes in equity or in the notes to the 
financial statements. 

Provides guidance to illustrate how to 
apply disclosure principles in AASB 134 for 
significant events and transactions.

Clarifies that when the fair value of award 
credits is measured based on the value of the 
awards for which they could be redeemed, 
the amount of discounts or incentives 
otherwise granted to customers not 
participating in the award credit scheme, is to 
be taken into account.

This Standard makes numerous editorial 
amendments to a range of Australian 
Accounting Standards and Interpretations, 
including amendments to reflect changes 
made to the text of IFRS by the IASB.

These amendments have no major impact 
on the requirements of the amended 
pronouncements.

The amendments increase the disclosure 
requirements for transactions involving 
transfers of financial assets. Disclosures 
require enhancements to the existing 
disclosures in IFRS 7 where an asset is 
transferred but is not derecognised and 
introduce new disclosures for assets that are 
derecognised but the entity continues to 
have a continuing exposure to the asset after 
the sale.

The requirements for classifying and 
measuring financial liabilities were added to 
AASB 9. The existing requirements for the 
classification of financial liabilities and the 
ability to use the fair value option have been 
retained. However, where the fair value option 
is used for financial liabilities the change in 
fair value is accounted for as follows:

•	 The change attributable to changes 
in credit risk are presented in other 
comprehensive income (OCI)

•	 The remaining change is presented in 

profit or loss

If this approach creates or enlarges an 
accounting mismatch in the profit or loss, the 
effect of the changes in credit risk are also 
presented in profit or loss.

38

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

RefeReNCe

title

summARy

APPliCAtioN 
DAte of 
stANDARD

imPACt oN gRouP 
fiNANCiAl RePoRt

APPliCAtioN 
DAte foR 
gRouP

1 January 2012 The Group has not yet 

1 July 2012

determined the full 
extent of the impact of 
the amendments, but 
does not believe it will 
have a material impact

These amendments address the 
determination of deferred tax on investment 
property measured at fair value and introduce 
a rebuttable presumption that deferred tax 
on investment property measured at fair value 
should be determined on the basis that the 
carrying amount will be recoverable through 
sale. The amendments also incorporate 
SIC-21 Income Taxes – Recovery of Revalued 
Non-Depreciable Assets into AASB 112.

This Standard makes amendments to many 
Australian Accounting Standards, removing 
the disclosures which have been relocated to 
AASB 1054.

1 July 2011

1 July 2011

The Group has not yet 
determined the full 
extent of the impact of 
the amendments, but 
does not believe it will 
have a material impact

AASB 2010-8

AASB 2011-1

Amendments 
to Australian 
Accounting 
Standards – 
Deferred Tax: 
Recovery of 
Underlying Assets 

[AASB 112]

Amendments 
to Australian 
Accounting 
Standards 
arising from the 
Trans-Tasman 
Convergence 
project 

[AASB 1, AASB 
5, AASB 101, 
AASB 107, AASB 
108, AASB 121, 
AASB 128, AASB 
132, AASB 134, 
Interpretation 2, 
Interpretation 112, 
Interpretation 113]

*  designates the beginning of the applicable annual reporting period unless otherwise stated

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

39

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

2

summARy of sigNifiCANt 
ACCouNtiNg PoliCies (CONTINUED)

(D)  BAsis of CoNsoliDAtioN

suBsequeNt to 1 July 2010
The consolidated financial statements comprise the financial statements 
of Prime Media Group Limited (the parent company) and all entities that 
Prime Media Group Limited controlled from time to time during the year 
and at reporting date. Interests in associates are equity accounted and are 
not part of the consolidated Group (see note (n) below).

Subsidiaries are all those entities over which the Group has the power to 
govern the financial and operating policies so as to obtain benefits from 
their activities. The existence and effect of potential voting rights that 
are currently exercisable or convertible are considered when assessing 
whether a group controls another entity.

The financial statements of subsidiaries are prepared for the same 
reporting period as the parent company, using consistent accounting 
policies. In preparing the consolidated financial statements, all 
intercompany balances and transactions, income and expenses and profit 
and losses resulting from intra-group transactions have been eliminated in 
full. Unrealised losses are eliminated unless costs cannot be recovered.

Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which control is 
transferred to the Group and cease to be consolidated from the date on 
which control is transferred out of the Group.

Investments in subsidiaries held by Prime Media Group Limited are 
accounted for at cost in the financial statements of the parent entity 
less any impairment charges. Dividends received from subsidiaries 
are recorded as a component of the reserves in the statement of 
comprehensive income of the parent entity, and do not impact the 
recorded cost of the investment. Upon receipt of dividends payments from 
subsidiaries, the parent will assess whether any indicators of impairment 
of the carrying value of the investment exist. Where such indicators 
exist to the extent that the carrying value of the investment exceeds its 
recoverable amount, an impairment loss is recognised.

The acquisition of subsidiaries is accounted for using the acquisition 
method of accounting. The acquisition method of accounting involves 
recognising at acquisition date, separately from goodwill, the identifiable 
intangible assets acquired, the liabilities assumed and non-controlling 
interest in the acquiree. The identifiable assets acquired and the liabilities 
assumed are measured at their acquisition date fair values (see note (e)).

Non-controlling interests are allocated their share of net profit after tax in 
the statement of comprehensive income and are presented within equity 
in the consolidated statement of financial position, separately from the 
equity of the owners of the parent.

Losses are attributed to the non-controlling interest even if that results in a 
deficit balance.

A change in the ownership interest of a subsidiary that does not result in a 
loss of control, is accounted for as an equity transaction.

If the Group loses control over a subsidiary, it:

•	 Derecognises the assets (including goodwill) and liabilities of the 

subsidiary.

•	 Derecognises the carrying amount of any non-controlling interest.
•	 Derecognises the cumulative translation differences, recorded in 

equity.

•	 Recognises the fair value of the consideration received.
•	 Recognises the fair value of any investment retained.
•	 Recognises any surplus or deficit in profit or loss.
•	 Reclassifies the parent’s share of components previously recognised in 
other comprehensive income to profit or loss, or retained earnings, as 
appropriate.

PRioR to 1 July 2010
Certain of the above mentioned requirements were applied on a 
prospective basis. The following differences, however, are carried forward 
in certain instances from the previous basis of consolidation:

•	 Acquisitions of non-controlling interests were accounted for using 

the parent entity extension method, whereby, the difference between 
the consideration and the book value of the share of the net assets 
acquired was recognised in goodwill.

•	 Losses incurred by the Group were attributed to the non-controlling 

interest until the balance was reduced to nil. Any further excess losses 
were attributed to the parent, unless the non-controlling interest had 
a binding obligation to cover these. Losses prior to 1 July 2010 were 
not reallocated between NCI and the parent shareholders.

•	 Upon loss of control, the Group accounted for the investment retained at 
its proportionate share of net asset value at the date control was lost. The 
carrying value of such investments at 1 July 2010 has not been restated.

(e)  BusiNess ComBiNAtioNs

suBsequeNt to 1 July 2010
Business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method. 
The consideration transferred in a business combination shall be measured 
at fair value, which shall be calculated as the sum of the acquisition-date 
fair values of the assets transferred by the acquirer, the liabilities incurred 
by the acquirer to former owners of the acquiree and equity issued by the 
acquirer, and the amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree. 
For each business combination, the acquirer measures the non-controlling 
interest in the acquiree. For each business combination, the acquirer 
measures the non-controlling interest in the acquiree either at fair value 
or at the proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets. 
Acquisition-related costs are expensed as incurred, and included in 
administrative expenses.

When the Group acquires a business, it assesses the financial assets 
and liabilities assumed for appropriate classification and designation in 
accordance with the contractual terms, economic conditions, the Group’s 
operating or accounting policies and other pertinent conditions as at the 
acquisition date.

If the business combination is achieved in stages, the acquisition date fair 
value of the acquirer’s previously held equity interest in the acquiree is 
remeasured to fair value at the acquisition date through profit or loss.

Any contingent consideration to be transferred by the acquirer will be 
recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. Subsequent changes to the 
fair value of the contingent consideration which is deemed to be an asset 
or liability will be recognised in accordance with AASB 139 either in profit 
or loss or as a change to other comprehensive income. If the contingent 
consideration is classified as equity, it shall not be remeasured until it is 
finally settled within equity.

PRioR to 1 July 2010
In comparison to the above-mentioned requirements, the following 
difference applied:

Business combinations were accounted for using the purchase method. 
Transaction costs directly attributable to the acquisition formed part of the 
acquisition costs. The non-controlling interest (formerly known as minority 
interest) was measured at the proportionate share of the acquiree’s 
identifiable net assets.

Business combinations achieved in stages were accounted for in separate 
steps. Any additional interest in the acquiree acquired does not affect 
previously recognised goodwill. The goodwill amounts calculated at each 
step of the acquisition were accumulated.

When the Group acquired a business, embedded derivatives from the 
host contract by the acquiree were not reassessed on acquisition unless 
the business combination resulted in a change in the terms of the contract 
that significantly modified the cash flows that otherwise would have been 
required under the contract.

Contingent consideration was recognised if, and only if, the Group had 
a present obligation, the economic outflow was more likely than not and 
a reliable estimate was determinable. Subsequent adjustments to the 
contingent consideration were adjusted against goodwill.

(f) 

 sigNifiCANt ACCouNtiNg JuDgemeNts, 
estimAtes AND AssumPtioNs

The preparation of the financial statements requires management to make 
judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts in 
the financial statements. Management continually evaluates its judgements 
and estimates in relation to assets, liabilities, contingent liabilities, revenue 
and expenses. Management bases its judgements and estimates on 
historical experience and on other factors it believes to be reasonable under 
the circumstances, the result of which forms the basis of the carrying values 
of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources.

40

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

Management has identified the following critical accounting policies 
for which significant judgements, estimates and assumptions are made. 
Actual results may differ from these estimates under different assumptions 
and may materially affect financial results or the financial position reported 
in future periods.

Further details of the nature of these assumptions and conditions may be 
found in the relevant notes to the financial statements.

sigNifiCANt ACCouNtiNg JuDgemeNts

(i) 
In the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies, management 
has made the following judgements, apart from those involving 
estimations, which have the most significant effect on the amounts 
recognised in the financial statements: 

Operating lease commitments – Group as lessor
The Group has entered into site sharing agreements in relation to 
transmission sites and equipment it owns. The Group has determined that 
it retains substantially all the significant risks and rewards of ownership of 
these properties and has thus classified the leases as operating leases.

Recovery of deferred tax assets
Deferred tax assets are recognised for deductible temporary differences, 
where management considers that it is probable that future taxable profits 
will be available to utilise those temporary differences.

Significant management judgement is required to determine the amount 
of deferred tax assets that can be recognised, based upon the likely timing 
and the level of future taxable profits over the next two years together with 
future tax planning strategies.

Impairment of non-financial assets other than goodwill
The Group assesses impairment of all assets at each reporting date by 
evaluating conditions specific to the Group and to the particular asset 
that may lead to impairment. These include product and manufacturing 
performance, technology, economic and political environment and future 
product expectations. If an impairment trigger exists the recoverable 
amount of the asset is determined. 

Classification of assets and liabilities as held for sale
The Group classifies assets and liabilities as held for sale when the 
carrying amount will be recovered through a sale transaction. The assets 
and liabilities must be available for immediate sale and the Group must 
be committed to selling the asset either through the entering into a 
contractual sale agreement or the activation and commitment to a 
program to locate a buyer and dispose of the assets and liabilities.

Impairment of investments in financial assets  
(including associates)
The Group assesses impairment of investments in financial assets including 
associates at each reporting date in accordance with the measurement 
rules established in the accounting standards. 

For financial assets determined to be associates, the Group assesses 
at each balance date the circumstances and conditions specific to 
that associate. These include operating performance, market and 
environmental factors. If management believes that an impairment trigger 
exists then the recoverable value of the investment in the associate is 
determined.

Renewal of Broadcasting Licences – refer 2(L)
The Group’s television and radio broadcasting licences consists of 
the right to broadcast television and radio services to specific market 
areas. These licences are issued by the relevant broadcasting authority 
for periods of 5 years. The ownership and renewal processes of these 
licences is such that in the absence of major breaches of licensing and 
broadcasting regulations, licence renewal is virtually guaranteed for the 
existing licence holders.

Taxation
The Group’s accounting policy for taxation requires management’s 
judgement as to the types of arrangements considered to be a tax on 
income in contrast to an operating cost. Judgement is also required 
in assessing whether deferred tax assets and certain deferred tax 
liabilities are recognised on the balance sheet. Deferred tax assets, 
including those arising from unrecouped tax losses, capital losses and 
temporary differences, are recognised only where it is considered more 
likely than not that they will be recovered, which is dependent on the 
generation of sufficient future taxable profits. Deferred tax liabilities 

arising from temporary differences in investments, caused principally by 
retained earnings held in foreign tax jurisdictions, are recognised unless 
repatriation of retained earnings can be controlled and are not expected 
to occur in the foreseeable future.

Assumptions about the generation of future taxable profits and repatriation 
of retained earnings depend on management’s estimates of future cash 
flows. These depend on estimates of future production and sales volumes, 
operating costs, restoration costs, capital expenditure, dividends and other 
capital management transactions. Judgements are also required about the 
application of income tax legislation. These judgements and assumptions 
are subject to risk and uncertainty, hence there is a possibility that changes 
in circumstances will alter expectations, which may impact the amount of 
deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities recognised on the statement 
of financial position and the amount of other tax losses and temporary 
differences not yet recognised. In such circumstances, some or all of the 
carrying amounts of recognised deferred tax assets and liabilities may 
require adjustment, resulting in a corresponding credit or charge to the 
statement of comprehensive income.

(ii) 

 sigNifiCANt ACCouNtiNg estimAtes 
AND AssumPtioNs

The carrying amounts of certain assets and liabilities are often determined 
based on estimates and assumptions of future events. The key estimates 
and assumptions that have a significant risk of causing a material 
adjustment to the carrying amounts of certain assets and liabilities within 
the next annual reporting period are:

Valuation of investments
The Group has decided to classify investments in listed and unlisted 
securities as “available-for-sale” investments and movements in fair value 
are recognised directly in equity. The fair value of listed shares has been 
determined by reference to published price quotations in an active market.

The fair values of unlisted securities not traded in an active market are 
determined using valuation assumptions that are not observable market 
prices or rates. Future likely cash flows are determined to most likely arise 
from the disposal of the securities. Disposal cash flows are determined 
using EBITDA multiples and compared to similar companies with 
observable market sales data. 

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles with indefinite useful lives
The Group determines whether goodwill and intangibles with indefinite 
useful lives are impaired at least on an annual basis. This requires an 
estimation of the recoverable amount of the cash generating units 
to which the goodwill and intangibles with indefinite useful lives are 
allocated. The assumptions used in this estimation of recoverable amount 
and the carrying amount of goodwill and intangibles with indefinite useful 
lives are discussed in note 16.

share-based payment transactions
The Group measures the cost of equity-settled transactions with 
employees by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments at the 
date at which they are granted. The fair value is determined by an external 
valuer using a binomial model, using the assumptions detailed in note 28.

Fair value of Financial Derivatives
The fair value of interest rate swap contracts is determined by reference to 
market values for similar instruments.

Estimation of useful lives of assets
The estimation of the useful lives of assets has been based on historical 
experience as well as external evidence such as warranties, lease terms and 
general renewal policies of the Group. The condition of assets is assessed 
regularly, at least annually, and considered against the remaining useful life.

If the useful lives of assets were shortened by 20% for each asset, the 
financial effect on consolidated depreciation expense for the current 
financial year and the next three years would be:

yeAR

2011

2012

2013

2014

$’000

2,335

1,815

1,499

1,200

Depreciation charges are included in note 15.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

41

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

2

summARy of sigNifiCANt 
ACCouNtiNg PoliCies (CONTINUED)

(g)  oPeRAtiNg segmeNts
An operating segment is a component of an entity that engages in 
business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur expenses 
(including revenues and expenses relating to transactions with other 
components of the same entity), whose operating results are regularly 
reviewed by the entity’s chief operating decision maker to make 
decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and assess its 
performance and for which discrete financial information is available. This 
includes start up operations which are yet to earn revenues. Management 
will also consider other factors in determining operating segments such 
as the existence of a line manager and the level of segment information 
presented to the board of directors.

Operating segments have been identified based on the information 
provided to the chief operating decision makers – being the executive 
management team.

The group aggregates two or more operating segments when they have 
similar economic characteristics, and the segments are similar in each of 
the following respects:

•	 Nature of the products and services
•	 Nature of the production processes
•	 Type or class of customer for the products and services
•	 Methods used to distribute the products or provide the services, and if 

applicable

•	 Nature of the regulatory environment

Operating segments that meet the quantitative criteria as prescribed by 
AASB 8 are reported separately. However, an operating segment that 
does not meet the quantitative criteria is still reported separately where 
information about the segment would be useful to users of the financial 
statement.

Information about other business activities and operating segments 
that are below the quantitative criteria are combined and disclosed in a 
separate category, “Unallocated”. 

(h)  foReigN CuRReNCy tRANslAtioN

fuNCtioNAl AND PReseNtAtioN CuRReNCy
(i) 
Both the functional and presentation currency of Prime Media Group 
Limited and its Australian subsidiaries is Australian dollars (A$). Each 
overseas entity in the Group determines its own functional currency and 
items included in the financial statements of each entity are measured 
using that functional currency. The financial statements of each foreign 
entity within the Group are translated to the Group’s presentation currency 
of $AUD (refer point ii & iii).

tRANsACtioNs AND BAlANCes 

(ii) 
Transactions in foreign currencies are initially recorded in the functional 
currency at the rate of exchange ruling at the date of the transaction. 
Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are 
retranslated at the rate of exchange ruling at the reporting date.

Non-monetary items that are measured in terms of historical cost in a 
foreign currency are translated using the exchange rate as at the date of 
the initial transaction. Non-monetary items that are measured at fair value 
in a foreign currency are translated using the exchange rate at the date 
when the fair value was determined.

(iii) 

 tRANslAtioN of gRouP ComPANies’ fuNCtioNAl 
CuRReNCy to PReseNtAtioN CuRReNCy 

The functional currencies of the Group’s overseas subsidiaries are as follows: 

•	 Prime Television New Zealand Limited, New Zealand dollars (NZ$)
•	 Prime Ventures New Zealand Limited, New Zealand dollars (NZ$)
•	 Producer Representatives Organization Inc, United States dollars (US$)
•	 Producer Representatives Organization International Inc., United States 

dollars (US$)

•	 Family Bloom Productions Inc, United States dollars (US$)
•	 Prime Resources One Limited, New Zealand dollars (NZ$)
•	 Prime Resources Two Limited, New Zealand dollars (NZ$)
•	 Prime Media Singapore Pte Ltd, Singapore dollars (S$)

As at the reporting date the assets and liabilities of these overseas 
subsidiaries are translated into the presentation currency of Prime Media 
Group Limited at the rate of exchange ruling at the reporting date and the 
statement of comprehensive income is translated at the weighted average 
exchange rates for the period.

The exchange differences arising on the translation are recognised in the 
foreign currency translation reserve in equity.

The exchange differences arising on the translation of foreign currency 
denominated intercompany balances held by the parent entity are 
recognised in the statement of comprehensive income of the parent entity 
but on consolidation they are taken directly to a separate component of 
equity.

On disposal of a foreign entity, the deferred cumulative amount 
recognised in equity relating to that particular foreign operation is 
recognised in the statement of comprehensive income.

(i)  CAsh AND CAsh equivAleNts
Cash and cash equivalents in the statement of financial position comprise 
cash at bank and on hand and short-term deposits with an original 
maturity of three months or less that are readily convertible to known 
amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk of changes 
in value.

For the purposes of the statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents 
consist of cash and cash equivalents as defined above, net of outstanding 
bank overdrafts. Bank overdrafts are included within interest-bearing loans 
and borrowings in current liabilities on the statement of financial position.

(J)  tRADe AND otheR ReCeivABles
Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently 
measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method less 
an allowance for impairment. Credit terms, generally 30 – 45 days, may 
be extended based upon an assessment of the credit standing of each 
customer.

Collectability of trade receivables is reviewed on an ongoing basis at an 
operating unit level. Individual debts that are known to be uncollectible 
are written off when identified. An impairment provision is recognized 
when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to collect 
the receivable. Objective evidence may be in the form of, but not limited 
to, legal rulings and determinations, defaults on agreed payment plans 
and age of debtors.

(k)  PRoPeRty, PlANt AND equiPmeNt
Plant and equipment is stated at historical cost less accumulated 
depreciation and any accumulated impairment losses. Such cost includes 
the cost of replacing parts that are eligible for capitalisation when the cost 
of replacing the part is incurred. All other repairs and maintenance are 
recognised in the profit and loss as incurred.

Land and buildings are measured at cost less accumulated depreciation 
on buildings.

Depreciation is provided on a straight-line basis on all property, plant and 
equipment, other than freehold and leasehold land, over the estimated 
useful life of the assets as follows:

mAJoR DePReCiAtioN PeRioDs ARe:

2011

2010

– Land

Not depreciated Not depreciated

– Freehold buildings:

40 years

40 years

– Leasehold improvements:

The lease term

The lease term

– Plant and equipment:

3 to 15 years

3 to 15 years

– Plant and equipment under lease: 5 to 15 years

5 to 15 years

– Motor vehicles

6 years

6 years

The assets’ residual values, useful lives and amortisation methods are 
reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each financial year end.

imPAiRmeNt
The carrying values of plant and equipment are reviewed for impairment 
when events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying value may 
not be recoverable.

42

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

The recoverable amount of plant and equipment is the greater of fair value 
less costs to sell and value in use. In assessing value in use, the estimated 
future cash flows are discounted to their present value using a pre-tax 
discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of 
money and the risks specific to the asset.

For an asset that does not generate largely independent cash inflows, the 
recoverable amount is determined for the cash-generating unit to which 
the asset belongs.

Impairment exists when the carrying value of an asset or cash-generating 
unit exceeds its estimated recoverable amount. The asset or cash-
generating unit is then written down to its recoverable amount. 

DeReCogNitioN AND DisPosAl
An item of property, plant and equipment is derecognised upon disposal 
or when no further future economic benefits are expected from its use or 
disposal. 

Any gain or loss arising on derecognition of the asset (calculated as the 
difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of 
the asset) is included in profit or loss in the year the asset is derecognised. 

(l)  gooDwill AND iNtANgiBle Assets

gooDwill
Goodwill acquired in a business combination is initially measured at 
cost of the business combination being the excess of the consideration 
transferred over the fair value of the Group’s net identifiable assets, 
liabilities and contingent liabilities. Goodwill on acquisition of subsidiaries 
is included in intangible assets. Goodwill on acquisition of associates is 
included in investments in associates.

Following initial recognition, goodwill is measured at cost less any 
accumulated impairment losses. 

For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill acquired in a business 
combination is, from the acquisition date, allocated to each of the Group’s 
cash-generating units, or groups of cash-generating units, that are 
expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination, irrespective 
of whether other assets or liabilities of the Group are assigned to those 
units or groups of units. Each unit or group of units to which the goodwill 
is so allocated, represents the lowest level within the Group at which 
the goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes; and is not 
larger than a segment based on either the Group’s primary or the Group’s 
secondary reporting format determined in accordance with AASB 8 
Operating Segments and includes: (see Note 16)

•	 Television Broadcasting
•	 Radio Broadcasting
•	 Online media

Impairment is determined by assessing the recoverable amount of the 
cash-generating unit (group of cash-generating units), to which the 
goodwill relates. Prime Media Group Limited performs its impairment 
testing as at 31 May each year using the value in use methodology for 
each cash generating unit to which goodwill and indefinite life intangibles 
have been allocated. Further details on the methodology and assumptions 
used are outlined in Note 16. When the recoverable amount of the cash-
generating unit (group of cash generating units) is less than the carrying 
amount, an impairment loss is recognised. When goodwill forms part of 
a cash-generating unit (group of cash-generating units) and an operation 
within that unit is disposed of, the goodwill associated with the operation 
disposed of is included in the carrying amount of the operation when 
determining the gain or loss on disposal of the operation. Goodwill 
disposed of in this manner is measured based on the relative values of 
the operation disposed of and the portion of the cash-generating unit 
retained. 

Impairment losses recognised for goodwill are not subsequently reversed.

televisioN AND RADio BRoADCAst liCeNCes, 
ACquiReD Both sePARAtely AND As PARt of A 
BusiNess ComBiNAtioN
Intangible assets, television and radio licences, acquired separately or 
in a business combination are initially measured at cost. The cost of an 
intangible asset acquired in a business combination is its fair value as at 
the date of acquisition. Following initial recognition, the intangible assets 
are carried at cost less any accumulated amortisation and any accumulated 
impairment losses.

Television and Radio broadcast licences consist of the right to broadcast 
television and radio services to specific market areas. The licences are 
subject to renewal by the Australian Communications and Media Authority 
(ACMA). The directors have no reason to believe the licences will not 
be renewed at the end of their legal terms and have not identified any 
factor that would affect their useful life. Therefore, the television and radio 
licences are deemed to have indefinite useful lives.

Intangible assets with indefinite useful lives are tested for impairment 
annually either individually or at the cash-generating unit level. Such 
intangibles are not amortised. The useful life of an intangible asset with 
an indefinite life is reviewed each reporting period to determine whether 
indefinite life assessment continues to be supportable. If not, the change 
in the useful life assessment from indefinite to finite is accounted for 
as a change in an accounting estimate and is thus accounted for on a 
prospective basis.

A summary of the policies applied to the Group’s intangible assets is as 
follows:

televisioN AND RADio BRoADCAst liCeNCes

– Useful lives:

– Method used:

Indefinite

Not depreciated or revalued

–  Internally generated/Acquired:

Acquired

–  Impairment test/Recoverable 

amount testing:

Annually and where an indicator of 
impairment exists

DeReCogNitioN
Gains or losses arising from derecognition of an intangible asset are 
measured as the difference between the net disposal proceeds and the 
carrying amount of the asset and are recognised in profit or loss when the 
asset is derecognised.

(m)  iNvestmeNts AND otheR fiNANCiAl Assets
Investments and financial assets in the scope of AASB 139 Financial 
Instruments: Recognition and Measurement are categorised as either 
financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, loans and receivables, 
held-to-maturity investments, or available-for-sale financial assets as 
appropriate. The classification depends on the purpose for which the 
investments were acquired. Designation is re-evaluated at each financial 
year end, but there are restrictions on reclassifying to other categories.

When financial assets are recognised initially, they are measured at fair 
value, plus, in the case of financial assets not at fair value through profit or 
loss, directly attributable transaction costs.

ReCogNitioN AND DeReCogNitioN
All regular purchases and sales of financial assets are recognised on the 
trade date i.e. the date that the Group commits to purchase or sell the 
asset. Regular way purchases or sales are purchases or sales of financial 
assets under contracts that require delivery of the assets within the period 
established generally by regulation or convention in the market place. 
Financial assets are derecognised when the right to receive cash flows 
from the financial assets has expired or been transferred.

suBsequeNt meAsuRemeNt

(i) 
Financial assets at fair value through profit and loss
Financial assets classified as held for trading are included in the category 
‘financial assets at fair value through profit or loss’. Financial assets are 
classified as held for trading if they are acquired for the purpose of selling 
in the near term with the intention of making a profit. Derivatives are 
also classified as held for trading unless they are designated as effective 
hedging instruments. Gains or losses on investments held for trading are 
recognised in profit or loss and the related assets are classified as current 
assets in the statement of financial position.

Loans and receivables

(ii) 
Loans and receivables including loan notes and loans to key management 
personnel are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable 
payments that are not quoted in an active market. Such assets are 
carried at amortised cost using the effective interest method. Gains and 
losses are recognised in profit or loss when the loans and receivables are 
derecognised or impaired, as well as through the amortisation process. 
These are included in current assets, except for those with maturities greater 
than 12 months after balance date, which are classified as non-current.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

43

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

2

summARy of sigNifiCANt 
ACCouNtiNg PoliCies (CONTINUED)

becomes obliged to make future payments in respect of the purchase of 
these goods and services. The amounts are unsecured and are usually 
settled within 30 days of recognition.

(m)  iNvestmeNts AND otheR fiNANCiAl Assets 

(CONTINUED)

(iii)  Available-for-sale investments
Available-for-sale investments are those non-derivative financial assets, 
principally equity securities that are designated as available-for-sale or 
are not classified as any of the two preceding categories. After initial 
recognition available-for-sale investments are measured at fair value with 
gains or losses being recognised as a separate component of equity until 
the investment is derecognised or until the investment is determined to 
be impaired, at which time the cumulative gain or loss previously reported 
in equity is recognised in profit or loss.

The fair value of investments that are actively traded in organised 
financial markets is determined by reference to quoted market bid prices 
at the close of business on the reporting date. For investments with 
no active market, fair value is determined using valuation techniques. 
Such techniques include using recent arm’s length market transactions; 
reference to the current market value of another instrument that is 
substantially the same; discounted cash flow analysis and option pricing 
models making as much use of available and supportable market data as 
possible and keeping judgemental inputs to a minimum.

(iv) 
Investments in controlled entities
Investments in controlled entities are recorded at cost.

iNvestmeNts iN AssoCiAtes

(N) 
The Group’s investments in its associates are accounted for using the 
equity method of accounting in the consolidated financial statements. 
The associates are entities in which the Group has significant influence 
and which are neither a subsidiary nor a joint venture. 

The Group generally deems they have significant influence if they have 
over 20% of the voting rights.

Under the equity method, the investment in the associate is carried 
in the consolidated statement of financial position at cost plus post-
acquisition changes in the Group’s share of net assets of the associate. 
Goodwill relating to an associate is included in the carrying amount of the 
investment and is not amortised. After application of the equity method, 
the Group determines whether it is necessary to recognise any impairment 
loss with respect to the Group’s net investment in the associate. 

Goodwill included in the carrying amount of the investment in the 
associate is not tested separately, rather the entire carrying amount of the 
investment is tested for impairment as a single asset. If an impairment is 
recognised the amount is not allocated to the goodwill of the associate.

The Group’s share of its associates’ post-acquisition profits or losses is 
recognised in the statement of comprehensive income, and its share of 
post-acquisition movements in reserves is recognised in reserves. The 
cumulative post-acquisition movements are adjusted against the carrying 
amount of the investment. Associates are recognised in the parent entity’s 
statement of income as a component of other income.

After application of the equity method, the Group determines whether 
it is necessary to recognise an additional impairment loss on the Group’s 
investment in its associate. The Group determines at each reporting 
date whether there is any objective evidence that the investment in the 
associate is impaired. If this is the case the Group calculates the amount 
of impairment as the difference between the recoverable amount of the 
associate and its carrying value and recognises the amount in the “share 
of profit of an associate” in the income statement.

When the Group’s share of losses in an associate equals or exceeds its 
interest in the associate, including any unsecured long-term receivables 
and loans, the Group does not recognise further losses, unless it has 
incurred obligations or made payments on behalf of the associate. 

The reporting dates of the associate and the Group are identical and the 
associate’s accounting policies conform to those used by the Group for 
like transactions and events in similar circumstances. 

(o)  tRADe AND otheR PAyABles
Trade payables and other payables are carried at amortised cost. They 
represent liabilities for goods and services provided to the Group prior 
to the end of the financial year that are unpaid and arise when the Group 

iNteRest-BeARiNg loANs AND BoRRowiNgs

(P) 
All loans and borrowings are initially recognised at the fair value of the 
consideration received less directly attributable transaction costs.

After initial recognition, interest-bearing loans and borrowings are 
subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. 
Fees paid on the establishment of loan facilities that are yield related are 
included as part of the carrying amount of the loans and borrowings.

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Group has an 
unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least 12 
months after the reporting date.

BoRRowiNg Costs
Borrowing costs attributable to the acquisition, construction or production 
of a qualifying asset (i.e. an asset that necessarily takes a substantial 
period of time to get ready for its intended use or sale) are capitalised as 
part of the cost of that asset. All other borrowing costs are expensed in 
the periods they occur. Borrowing costs consist of interest and other costs 
that an entity incurs in connection with the borrowing of funds. The Group 
does not currently hold qualifying assets but, if it did, the borrowing costs 
directly associated with this asset would be capitalised (including any other 
associated costs directly attributable to the borrowing and temporary 
investment income earned on the borrowing).

(q)  PRovisioNs AND emPloyee leAve BeNefits
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation (legal 
or constructive) as a result of a past event, it is probable that an outflow 
of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle the 
obligation and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.

When the Group expects some or all of a provision to be reimbursed, for 
example under an insurance contract, the reimbursement is recognised 
as a separate asset but only when the reimbursement is virtually certain. 
The expense relating to any provision is presented in the statement of 
comprehensive income net of any reimbursement.

Provisions are measured at the present value of management’s best 
estimate of the expenditure required to settle the present obligation at 
the reporting date using a discounted cash flow methodology. The risks 
specific to the provision are factored into the cash flows and as such a risk-
free government bond rate relative to the expected life of the provision is 
used as a discount rate. If the effect of the time value of money is material, 
provisions are discounted using a current pre-tax rate that reflects the 
time value of money and, where appropriate, the risks specific to the 
liability. The increase in the provision resulting from the passage of time is 
recognised in finance costs. 

emPloyee leAve BeNefits

(i)  wages, salaries, annual leave and sick leave
Liabilities for wages and salaries, including non-monetary benefits, annual 
leave and accumulating sick leave expected to be settled within 12 
months of the reporting date are recognised in other payables in respect 
of employees’ services up to the reporting date. They are measured at the 
amounts expected to be paid when the liabilities are settled. Expenses for 
non-accumulating sick leave are recognised when the leave is taken and 
are measured at the rates paid or payable. 

Long service leave

(ii) 
The liability for long service leave is recognised and measured as the 
present value of expected future payments to be made in respect of services 
provided by employees up to the reporting date using the projected unit 
credit method. Consideration is given to expected future wage and salary 
levels, experience of employee departures, and periods of service. Expected 
future payments are discounted using market yields at the reporting date on 
national government bonds with terms to maturity and currencies that match, 
as closely as possible, the estimated future cash outflows. 

(R)  shARe-BAseD PAymeNt tRANsACtioNs
The Group provides benefits to its employees (including directors) in the 
form of share-based payments, whereby employees render services in 
exchange for shares or rights over shares (‘equity-settled transactions’).

During the current year there was one scheme in place to provide 
these benefits:

44

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

•	 The Prime Employee Share Option Plan, which provides benefits to 

(i)  gRouP As A lessee

directors and executives.

Subsequent to the reporting date this plan has ceased and the Company 
has implemented a new plan called the Prime Media Group Performance 
Rights Plan.

The cost of these equity-settled transactions with employees is measured 
by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments at the date at which 
they are granted. The fair value is determined by an external valuer using a 
binomial model, further details of which are given in note 28.

In valuing equity-settled transactions, no account is taken of any vesting 
conditions, other than conditions linked to the price of the shares of Prime 
Media Group Limited (‘market conditions’) if applicable.

The cost of equity–settled transactions is recognised, together with 
a corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which the 
performance conditions are fulfilled (the vesting period), ending on the 
date on which the relevant employees become fully-entitled to the award 
(the vesting date).

At each subsequent reporting date until vesting, the cumulative charge to 
the statement of comprehensive income is the product of:

(i)  the grant date fair value of the award;
(ii)  the current best estimate of awards that, in the opinion of the directors 

of the Group, will ultimately vest. This opinion is formed based on the 
best available information at balance date. No adjustment is made 
for the likelihood of market performance conditions being met as the 
effect of these conditions is included in the determination of fair value 
at grant date; and

(iii) the expired portion of the vesting period.

The charge to the statement of comprehensive income for the period 
is the cumulative amount as calculated above less the amounts already 
charged in previous periods. There is a corresponding credit to equity.

Equity settled awards granted by Prime Media Group Limited to employees 
of subsidiaries are recognised in the parents’ separate financial statements 
as an additional investment in the subsidiary with a corresponding credit to 
equity. As a result, the expense recognised by Prime Media Group Limited 
in relation to equity-settled awards only represents the expense associated 
with employees of the parent. The expense recognised by the Group is the 
total expense associated with such awards.

Until an award has vested, any amounts recorded are contingent and will 
be adjusted if more or fewer awards vest than were originally anticipated 
to do so. Any award subject to a market condition is considered to vest 
irrespective of whether or not that market condition is fulfilled, provided 
that all other conditions are satisfied.

If a non-vesting condition is within the control of the Group, Company 
or the employee, the failure to satisfy the condition is treated as a 
cancellation. If a non-vesting condition within the control of neither the 
Group, Company nor employee is not satisfied during the vesting period, 
any expense for the award not previously recognised is recognised over 
the remaining vesting period, unless the award is forfeited.

If the terms of an equity-settled award are modified, as a minimum 
an expense is recognised as if the terms had not been modified. An 
additional expense is recognised for any modification that increases the 
total fair value of the share-based payment arrangement, or is otherwise 
beneficial to the employee, as measured at the date of modification.

If an equity-settled award is cancelled, it is treated as if it had vested on 
the date of cancellation, and any expense not yet recognised for the award 
is recognised immediately. However, if a new award is substituted for the 
cancelled award and designated as a replacement award on the date that 
it is granted, the cancelled and new award are treated as if they were a 
modification of the original award, as described in the previous paragraph.

The dilutive effect, if any, of outstanding options is reflected as additional 
share dilution in the computation of diluted earnings per share (see note 7).

(s)  leAses
The determination of whether an arrangement is or contains a lease is 
based on the substance of the arrangement at inception date, whether 
fulfilment of the arrangement is dependent on the use of a specific asset 
or assets or the arrangement conveys a right to use the asset, even if that 
right is not explicitly specified in an arrangement.

Leases are classified at their inception as either operating or finance leases 
based on the economic substance of the agreement so as to reflect the 
risks and benefits incidental to ownership.

Operating leases
Operating lease payments are recognised as an expense in the statement 
of comprehensive income on a straight-line basis over the lease term. 
Operating lease incentives are recognised as a liability when received 
and subsequently reduced by allocating lease payments between rental 
expense and reduction of the liability.

Leasehold Improvements
The cost of improvements to or on leasehold property are capitalised, 
disclosed as leasehold improvements, and amortised over the unexpired 
period of the lease or the estimated useful lives of the improvements, 
whichever is the shorter.

Finance leases
Finance leases, which effectively transfer substantially all of the risks and 
benefits incidental to ownership of the leased item, are capitalised at 
inception of the lease at the fair value of the leased property or, if lower, 
at present value of the minimum lease payments. Lease payments are 
allocated between finance charges and reduction of the lease liability so 
as to achieve a constant rate of interest on the remaining balance of the 
liability. Finance charges are recognised in finance costs in profit or loss.

Capitalised lease assets are depreciated over the shorter of the estimated 
useful life of the assets and the lease term if there is no reasonable certainty 
that the Group will obtain ownership by the end of the lease term. 

(ii)  gRouP As A lessoR
Leases in which the Group retains substantially all the risks and benefits 
of ownership of the leased asset are classified as operating leases. Initial 
direct costs incurred in negotiating an operating lease are added to the 
carrying amount of the leased asset and recognised as an expense over 
the lease term on the same basis as rental income. Contingent rents are 
recognised as revenue in the period in which they are earned.

(t)  ReveNue ReCogNitioN
Revenue is recognised and measured at the fair value of the consideration 
received or receivable to the extent it is probable that the economic 
benefits will flow to the Group and the revenue can be reliably measured. 
The following specific recognition criteria must also be met before 
revenue is recognised:

ADveRtisiNg ReveNue
Broadcasting operations derive revenue primarily from the sale of 
advertising time, to local, regional and national advertisers. Revenue is 
recognised when the commercial advertisements are broadcast.

CommeRCiAl ADveRtisemeNt PRoDuCtioN ReveNue
Revenue is recognised at the time of invoicing the customers, which is on 
completion of the production.

ReNDeRiNg of seRviCes
Revenue from the provision of production facilities is brought to account 
after services have been rendered and the fee is receivable.

sAles RePReseNtAtioN ReveNue
Sales Representation revenue is brought to account as the service is provided.

iNteRest
Interest revenue is recognised as interest accrues using the effective 
interest method. This is a method of calculating the amortised cost of a 
financial asset and allocating the interest income over the relevant period 
using the effective interest rate, which is the rate that exactly discounts 
estimated future cash receipts through the expected life of the financial 
asset to the net carrying amount of the financial asset. 

DiviDeNDs
Dividend revenue is recognised when the Group’s right to receive the 
payment is established.

ReNtAl iNCome
Rental income is derived from the sub-letting of the Group’s property, 
plant and equipment. This rental income is recognised on a straight 
line basis over the lease term. Contingent rental income is recognised 
as income in the periods in which it is earned. Lease incentives are 
recognised as an integral part of the total rental income.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

45

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

2

summARy of sigNifiCANt 
ACCouNtiNg PoliCies (CONTINUED)

(u)  goveRNmeNt gRANts
Government grants are recognised at their fair value where there is 
reasonable assurance that the grant will be recovered and all attaching 
conditions will be complied with.

When the grant relates to an expense item, it is recognised as income 
over the periods necessary to match the grant on a systematic basis to the 
costs that it is intended to compensate. 

Where the grant relates to an asset, the fair value is credited to a deferred 
income account and is released to the statement of comprehensive income 
over the expected useful life of the relevant asset by equal annual instalments.

iNCome tAx

(v) 
Current tax assets and liabilities for the current and prior periods are 
measured at the amount expected to be recovered from or paid to the 
taxation authorities based on the current period’s taxable income. The tax 
rates and tax laws used to compute the amount are those that are enacted 
or substantively enacted at the reporting date.

Current income tax relating to items recognised directly in equity is 
recognised in equity and not in the income statement. Management 
periodically evaluates positions taken in the tax returns with respect to 
situations in which applicable tax regulations are subject to interpretation 
and establishes provisions where appropriate.

Deferred income tax is provided on all temporary differences at the 
balance sheet date between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their 
carrying amounts for financial reporting purposes.

Deferred income tax liabilities are recognised for all taxable temporary 
differences:

•	 except where the deferred tax liability arises from the initial 

•	

recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction that is not a business 
combination and, at the time of the transaction, affects neither the 
accounting profit nor taxable profit or loss; and
in respect of taxable temporary differences associated with 
investments in subsidiaries, except where the timing of the reversal on 
the temporary differences can be controlled and it is probable that the 
temporary differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Deferred income tax assets are recognised for all taxable temporary 
differences, carried forward unused tax credits and unused tax losses, to 
the extent that it is probable that taxable profit will be available against 
which the deductible temporary and the carry forward of unused tax 
credits and unused tax losses can be utilised, except:

•	 when the deferred income tax asset relating to the deductible 

temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of an asset or 
liability in a transaction that is not a business combination and, at the 
time of the transaction, affects neither the accounting profit nor taxable 
profit or loss; or

•	 when the deductible temporary difference is associated with 

investments in subsidiaries, associates or joint ventures, in which case 
a deferred tax asset is only recognised to the extent that it is probable 
that the temporary difference will reverse in the foreseeable future and 
taxable profit will be available against which the temporary difference 
can be utilised.

The carrying amount of deferred income tax assets is reviewed at each 
reporting date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that 
sufficient taxable profit will be available to allow all or part of the deferred 
income tax asset to be utilised.

Unrecognised deferred income tax assets are reassessed at each reporting 
date and are recognised to the extent that it has become probable that future 
tax profit will be available to allow the deferred tax asset to be recovered.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax rates 
that are expected to apply to the year when the asset is realised or the 
liability is settled, based on tax rates (and tax laws) that have been enacted 
or substantively enacted at the reporting date.

Deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities are offset only if a legally 
enforceable right exists to set off current tax assets against current tax 
liabilities and the deferred tax assets and liabilities relate to the same 
taxable entity and the same taxation authority.

tAx CoNsoliDAtioN
Effective 1 July 2002, for the purposes of income taxation, Prime Media 
Group Limited and its 100% owned Australian resident subsidiaries formed 
a tax consolidated group. Prime Media Group Limited is the head entity 
of the tax consolidated group. Members of the group entered into a 
tax sharing arrangement in order to allocate income tax expense to the 
wholly owned subsidiaries on a pro-rata basis. In addition, the agreement 
provides for the allocation of income tax liabilities between the entities 
should the head entity default on its tax payment obligations. At the 
reporting date, the possibility of default is remote. 

Prime Media Group Limited formally notified the Australian Tax Office of 
its adoption of the tax consolidation regime when it lodged its 30 June 
2003 consolidated tax return.

tAx effeCt ACCouNtiNg By memBeRs of the 
CoNsoliDAteD gRouP
Members of the tax consolidated group have entered into a tax funding 
agreement. The tax funding agreement provides for the allocation of 
current taxes to members of the tax consolidated group in accordance 
with their taxable income for the period, while deferred taxes are allocated 
to members of the tax consolidated group in accordance with the 
principles of AASB 112 Income Taxes. Allocations under the tax funding 
agreement are made at the end of each half year.

The allocation of taxes under the tax funding agreement is recognised as 
an increase/decrease in the subsidiaries’ intercompany accounts with the 
tax consolidated group head company, Prime Media Group Limited. In 
accordance with UIG 1052: Tax Consolidation Accounting, the Group has 
applied the “separate Taxpayer within group” approach in determining 
the appropriate amount of current taxes to allocate to members of the tax 
consolidated group.

(w)  otheR tAxes
Revenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount 
of GST except: 

•	 where the GST incurred on a purchase of goods and services is not 
recoverable from the taxation authority, in which case the GST is 
recognised as part of the cost of acquisition of the asset or as part of 
the expense item as applicable; and 
receivables and payables are stated with the amount of GST included.

•	

The net amount of GST recoverable from, or payable to, the taxation 
authority is included as part of receivables or payables in the statement of 
financial position.

Cash flows are included in the statement of cash flows on a gross basis 
and the GST component of cash flows arising from investing and financing 
activities, which is recoverable from, or payable to, the taxation authority, 
is classified as part of operating cash flows.

Commitments and contingencies are disclosed net of the amount of GST 
recoverable from, or payable to, the taxation authority.

(x) 

 DeRivAtive fiNANCiAl iNstRumeNts  
AND heDgiNg

The Group uses derivative financial instruments such as forward currency 
contracts and interest rate swaps to manage its risks associated with 
interest rate and foreign currency fluctuations. Such derivative financial 
instruments are initially recognised at fair value on the date on which a 
derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently remeasured to fair 
value. Derivatives are carried as assets when their fair value is positive and 
as liabilities when their fair value is negative.

Any gains or losses arising from changes in the fair value of derivatives are 
taken directly to net profit or loss for the year. 

The fair values of forward currency contracts are calculated by reference to 
current forward exchange rates for contracts with similar maturity profiles. 
The fair values of interest rate swap contracts are determined by reference 
to market values for similar instruments.

(y) 

 DeReCogNitioN of fiNANCiAl  
Assets AND fiNANCiAl liABilities

fiNANCiAl Assets
A financial asset (or, where applicable, a part of a financial asset or part of 
a group of similar financial assets) is derecognised when:

46

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

•	
•	

•	

the rights to receive cash flows from the asset have expired;
the Group retains the right to receive cash flows from the asset, but has 
assumed an obligation to pay them in full without material delay to a 
third party under a ‘pass-through’ arrangement; or
the Group has transferred its rights to receive cash flows from the asset 
and either (a) has transferred substantially all the risks and rewards of 
the asset, or (b) has neither transferred nor retained substantially all the 
risks and rewards of the asset, but has transferred control of the asset.

When the Group has transferred its rights to receive cash flows from an 
asset and has neither transferred nor retained substantially all the risks 
and rewards of the asset nor transferred control of the asset, the asset is 
recognised to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement in the 
asset. Continuing involvement that takes the form of a guarantee over the 
transferred asset is measured at the lower of the original carrying amount 
of the asset and the maximum amount of consideration received that the 
Group could be required to repay. 

When continuing involvement takes the form of a written and/or 
purchased option (including a cash-settled option or similar provision) on 
the transferred asset, the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement is 
the amount of the transferred asset that the Group may repurchase, except 
that in the case of a written put option (including a cash-settled option 
or similar provision) on an asset measured at fair value, the extent of the 
Group’s continuing involvement is limited to the lower of the fair value of 
the transferred asset and the option exercise price. 

fiNANCiAl liABilities
A financial liability is derecognised when the obligation under the liability 
is discharged or cancelled or expires. 

When an existing financial liability is replaced by another from the same 
lender on substantially different terms, or the terms of an existing liability 
are substantially modified, such an exchange or modification is treated as a 
derecognition of the original liability and the recognition of a new liability, 
and the difference in the respective carrying amounts is recognised in 
profit or loss. 

imPAiRmeNt of fiNANCiAl Assets

(z) 
The Group assesses at each balance sheet date whether a financial asset 
or group of financial assets is impaired.

fiNANCiAl Assets CARRieD At AmoRtiseD Cost
If there is objective evidence that an impairment loss on loans and 
receivables carried at amortised cost has been incurred, the amount of the 
loss is measured as the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and 
the present value of estimated future cash flows (excluding future credit 
losses that have not been incurred) discounted at the financial asset’s 
original effective interest rate (i.e. the effective interest rate computed 
at initial recognition). The carrying amount of the asset is reduced either 
directly or through use of an allowance account. The amount of the loss is 
recognised in profit or loss. 

The Group first assesses whether objective evidence of impairment 
exists individually for financial assets that are individually significant, and 
individually or collectively for financial assets that are not individually 
significant. If it is determined that no objective evidence of impairment 
exists for an individually assessed financial asset, whether significant or not, 
the asset is included in a group of financial assets with similar credit risk 
characteristics and that group of financial assets is collectively assessed for 
impairment. Assets that are individually assessed for impairment and for 
which an impairment loss is or continues to be recognised are not included 
in a collective assessment of impairment. 

If, in a subsequent period, the amount of the impairment loss decreases 
and the decrease can be related objectively to an event occurring after the 
impairment was recognised, the previously recognised impairment loss is 
reversed. Any subsequent reversal of an impairment loss is recognised in 
profit or loss, to the extent that the carrying value of the asset does not 
exceed its amortised cost at the reversal date. 

fiNANCiAl Assets CARRieD At Cost
If there is objective evidence that an impairment loss has been incurred on 
an unquoted equity instrument that is not carried at fair value (because its 
fair value cannot be reliably measured), or on a derivative asset that is linked 
to and must be settled by delivery of such an unquoted equity instrument, 
the amount of the loss is measured as the difference between the asset’s 
carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows, 
discounted at the current market rate of return for a similar financial asset.

(AA)  imPAiRmeNt of NoN-fiNANCiAl Assets 
otheR thAN gooDwill AND iNDefiNite 
life iNtANgiBles

Intangible assets, non-financial assets other than goodwill and indefinite 
life intangibles are tested annually for impairment or more frequently if 
events or changes in circumstances indicate that they might be impaired.

The Group conducts an annual internal review of asset values, which is 
used as a source of information to assess for any indicators of impairment. 
External factors, such as changes in expected future processes, technology 
and economic conditions, are also monitored to assess for indicators 
of impairment. If any indication of impairment exists, an estimate of the 
asset’s recoverable amount is calculated.

An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s 
carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. Recoverable amount is 
the higher of an asset’s fair value less cost to sell and value in use. For the 
purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels 
for which there are separately identifiable cash inflows that are largely 
independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets (cash 
generating units). Non-financial assets other than goodwill that suffered an 
impairment, are tested for possible reversal of the impairment whenever 
events or changes in circumstances indicate that the impairment may have 
reversed.

(BB)  CoNtRiButeD equity
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly 
attributable to the issue of new shares or options are shown in equity as a 
deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds. 

(CC)  eARNiNgs PeR shARe
Basic earnings per share is calculated as net profit attributable to members 
of the parent, adjusted to exclude any costs of servicing equity (other 
than dividends) and preference share dividends, divided by the weighted 
average number of ordinary shares, adjusted for any bonus element. 

Diluted earnings per share is calculated as net profit attributable to 
members of the parent, adjusted for:

•	 costs of servicing equity (other than dividends) and preference share 

•	

dividends;
the after-tax effect of dividends and interest associated with dilutive 
potential ordinary shares that have been recognised as expenses; and

•	 other non-discretionary changes in revenues or expenses during the 

period that would result from the dilution of potential ordinary shares; 

divided by the weighted average number of ordinary shares and dilutive 
potential ordinary shares, adjusted for any bonus element.

(DD)  NoN-CuRReNt Assets AND DisPosAl 

gRouPs helD foR sAle AND 
DisCoNtiNueD oPeRAtioNs

Non-current assets and disposal groups are classified as held for sale and 
measured at the lower of their carrying amount and fair value less costs 
to sell if their carrying amount will be recovered principally through a sale 
transaction. They are not depreciated or amortised. For an asset or disposal 
group to be classified as held for sale it must be available for immediate 
sale in its present condition and its sale must be highly probable. 

An impairment loss is recognised for any initial or subsequent write-down 
of the asset (or disposal group) to fair value less costs to sell. A gain is 
recognised for any subsequent increases in fair value less costs to sell of an 
asset (or disposal group), but not in excess of any cumulative impairment 
loss previously recognised. A gain or loss not previously recognised by the 
date of the sale of the non-current asset (or disposal group) is recognised 
at the date of derecognition.

A discontinued operation is a component of the entity that has been 
disposed of or is classified as held for sale and that represents a separate 
major line of business or geographical area of operations, is part of a 
single coordinated plan to dispose of such a line of business or area of 
operations, or is a subsidiary acquired exclusively with a view to resale. The 
results of discontinued operations are presented separately on the face of 
the statement of comprehensive income and the assets and liabilities are 
presented separately on the face of the statement of financial position.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

47

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

3

fiNANCiAl Risk mANAgemeNt oBJeCtives AND PoliCies

The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise receivables, payables, bank loans, bank overdrafts, available-for-sale investments, finance lease 
contracts, cash, short-term deposits and derivatives.

Risk exPosuRes AND ResPoNses
The main purpose of these financial instruments is to raise finance for the Group’s operations. The Group has various other financial assets and liabilities 
such as trade receivables and trade payables, which arise directly from its operations. The Group manages its exposure to key financial risks including 
interest rate and currency risk in accordance with the Group’s financial risk management policy. The objective of the policy is to support the delivery of the 
Group’s financial targets while protecting future financial security.

The Group also enters into derivative transactions, including principally interest rate swaps and forward currency contracts. The purpose is to manage the 
interest rate and currency risks arising from the Group’s operations and its sources of finance. It is, and has been throughout the period under review, the 
Group’s policy that no trading of financial instruments shall be undertaken. The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments are cash flow risk, 
interest rate risk, liquidity risk, foreign currency risk and credit risk.

The Group uses different methods to measure and manage different types of risks to which it is exposed. These include monitoring levels of exposure to 
interest rate and foreign exchange risk and assessments of market forecasts for interest rate, foreign exchange and commodity prices. Ageing analyses 
and monitoring of specific credit allowances are undertaken to manage credit risk. Liquidity risk is monitored through the development of future rolling 
cash flow forecasts.

The Board reviews and agrees policies for managing each of these risks as summarised below.

Primary responsibility for identification and control of financial risks rests with the Chief Executive Officer and the Audit and Risk Committee under the 
authority of the Board. The Board reviews and agrees policies for managing each of the risks identified below, including the setting of limits for hedging 
cover of foreign currency and interest rate risk, credit allowances, and future cash flow forecast projections.

Interest rate risk

(i) 
The Group’s exposure to market interest rates relates primarily to the Group’s long-term debt obligations as well as derivative interest rate swap contracts. 
The level of debt is disclosed in note 18.

At balance date, the Group had the following mix of financial assets and liabilities exposed to Australian variable interest rate risk that are not designated 
as cash flow hedges:

financial Assets

Cash and cash equivalents

financial liabilities

Secured Bank Loans

Derivatives

Net exposure

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

19,374

19,374

(150,024)

(1,687)

(151,711)

(132,337)

2010
$’000

5,664

5,664

(169,077)

(3,020)

(172,097)

(166,433)

Interest rate swap contracts outlined in note 24, with a fair value liability of $1,687,000 (2010: Liability $3,020,000), are exposed to fair value movements 
if interest rates change. All derivative financial instruments are stated at fair value with any gains or losses arising from changes in fair value being taken 
directly to the profit and loss for the year.

The Group’s policy is to manage its finance costs using a mix of fixed and variable rate debt. The Group’s policy is to keep at least 50% of its borrowings 
at fixed rates of interest. To manage this mix in a cost-efficient manner, the Group enters into interest rate swaps, in which the Group agrees to exchange, 
at specified intervals, the difference between fixed and variable interest amounts calculated by reference to an agreed-upon notional principal amount. At 
30 June 2011, after taking into account the effect of interest rate swaps, approximately 63% of the Group’s borrowings are at a fixed rate of interest (2010: 
56%).

The Group constantly analyses its interest rate exposure. Within this analysis consideration is given to potential renewals of existing positions, alternative 
financing, alternative hedging positions and the mix of fixed and variable interest rates.

The following sensitivity analysis is based on the interest rate risk exposures in existence at the reporting date:

At 30 June 2011, if interest rates had moved, as illustrated in the table below, with all other variables held constant, post tax profit and equity would have 
been affected as follows:

JuDgemeNts of ReAsoNABly PossiBle movemeNts:

Consolidated

+1% (100 basis points)

-1% (100 basis points)

Post tAx PRofit
higheR/(loweR)

2011
$’000

(105)

105

2010
$’000

274

(274)

equity
higheR/(loweR)

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

–

–

–

–

The movements in profit are due to higher/lower interest costs from variable rate debt and cash balances. The sensitivity is lower in 2011 than 2010 
because the interest rate swap contracts are twelve months closer to expiry which reduces the fair value movement arising from changes in interest rates 
and net borrowings are approximately 19% lower than the prior year closing balance.

48

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

Significant assumptions used in the interest rate sensitivity analysis include:

•	 Reasonable movements in interest rates were determined based on the Group’s current credit rating and mix of debt in Australia and foreign 
countries, relationships with financial institutions, the level of debt that is expected to be renewed and economic forecaster’s expectations;
•	 The net exposure at balance date is representative of what the Group was and is expecting to be exposed to in the next twelve months from 

balance date.

Foreign currency risk

(ii) 
The Group operates in two countries – Australia and New Zealand. The majority of transactions for the Group entities are made in the functional currency 
of the relevant entity.

From time to time the Group enters into transactions that give rise to currency exposure risks. Such currency exposures arise from purchases in currencies 
other than the Group’s functional currency.

The Group reviews the transactional currency risks arising from significant foreign currency transactions and enters into appropriate forward currency 
contracts to reduce currency risks.

The Group also has foreign currency translation risk where the operations of the foreign based subsidiaries are translated to the Group’s reporting currency. 

At 30 June 2011, the Group had the following exposure to NZ$ foreign currency that is not designated as cash flow hedges:

financial Assets

Receivables – Deferred contingent consideration

Net exposure

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

1,773

1,773

2010
$’000

–

–

As at balance date, the Group does not have any forward currency contracts (2010: Nil) designated as cash flow hedges that are subject to fair value 
movements through equity and profit and loss respectively as foreign exchange rates move.

As at 30 June 2011, apart from the foreign currency translation risks within the Group, there were no other exposures to currency fluctuations.

The foreign currency exposures within the Group relate to the translation to the Group presentation currency of AUD. These translation differences are 
taken to profit or loss.

Management believes the balance date risk exposures are representative of the risk exposure inherent in the financial instruments.

(iii)  Credit risk
Credit risk arises from the financial assets of the Group, which comprise cash and cash equivalents, trade and other receivables, available-for-sale financial 
assets and derivative instruments. The Group’s exposure to credit risk arises from potential default of the counterparty, with a maximum exposure equal to 
the carrying amount of these instruments. Exposure at balance date is addressed in each applicable note.

The Group does not hold any credit derivatives to offset its credit exposure.

The Group trades only with recognised, creditworthy third parties, and as such collateral is not requested nor is it the Group’s policy to securitise its trade 
and other receivables.

It is the Group’s policy that all customers who wish to trade on credit terms are subject to credit verification procedures including an assessment of their 
independent credit rating, financial position, past experience and industry reputation. Risk limits are set for each individual customer in accordance with 
parameters set by the Board. These risk limits are regularly monitored.

In addition, receivable balances are monitored on an ongoing basis with the result that the Group’s exposure to bad debts is not significant.

The Group maintains cash on deposit only with major Australian banks or similar in countries of operation. Excess cash reserves of foreign subsidiaries are 
used to repay intercompany borrowings. Limited cash reserves are held outside Australia.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

49

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

3

fiNANCiAl Risk mANAgemeNt oBJeCtives AND PoliCies (CONTINUED)

Risk exPosuRes AND ResPoNses (CONTINUED)

(iii)  Credit risk (continued)

Credit quality of financial assets

yeAR eNDeD 30 JuNe 2011

Current financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade and other receivables

Non-current financial assets

Trade and other receivables

yeAR eNDeD 30 JuNe 2010

Current financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade and other receivables

Non-current financial assets

Trade and other receivables

equivAleNt 
s&P RAtiNg*

iNteRNAlly RAteD**

A+ AND
ABove

New
CustomeRs

Closely
moNitoReD
CustomeRs

No DefAult
CustomeRs

totAl

19,374

–

19,374

–

–

5,664

–

5,664

–

–

–

8,717

8,717

–

–

–

3,043

3,043

–

–

–

539

539

–

–

–

4,209

4,209

–

–

–

45,131

45,131

672

672

–

44,262

44,262

317

317

19,374

54,387

73,761

672

672

5,664

51,514

57,178

317

317

*  The equivalent S&P rating of the financial assets represents that rating of the counterparty with whom the financial asset is held rather than the rating of the financial asset itself.
**  New customers are counterparties with whom the Group has traded for less than one year. No default customers are customers with whom the Group has traded for greater 
than one year and have no history of default, late payments, renegotiated terms or breach of their credit terms within the past two years. Closely monitored customers are 
customers with whom the Group has traded for greater than one year and do not qualify as no default customers.

A small number of media buying agencies account for approximately 60% of the Company’s revenue and no individual agency accounts for more than 
15% of the Company’s revenue. Agency clients operate with strict credit terms of 45 days and are required to provide detailed financial information as 
part of their credit approval process. Late payments are closely monitored and followed up if the 45 day terms are not met.

Liquidity risk

(iv) 
Liquidity risk arises from the financial liabilities of the Group and the Group’s subsequent ability to meet their obligations to repay their financial liabilities 
as and when they fall due.

The Group’s objective is to maintain a balance between continuity of funding and flexibility through the use of bank loans and finance leases.

The Group currently has funding through:

•	 $260 million Debenture Subscription Facility (2010: $260 million), which is currently drawn to 58% of the facility limit (2010: 62%); and
•	 Long Term finance lease contracts over specific items of plant and equipment.

The Group manages its liquidity risk by monitoring the total cash inflows and outflows expected on a weekly basis. The Company has established 
comprehensive risk reporting covering its business units that reflects expectations of management of the expected settlement of financial assets and 
liabilities.

It is the Group’s policy that renegotiation of existing funding facilities are commenced at least twelve months prior to the maturity date of the existing facilities.

On 26 August 2011 the Company secured a commitment from its bankers to provide a $200 million bank loan facility with a term of 4 years, repayable in 
full on expiry. Interest will be charged at a rate of BBSY plus a margin between 1.70% and 2.60%. Formal documentation is expected to be executed on 30 
September 2011.

At 30 June 2011, 0.4% of the Group’s debt will mature in less than one year (2010: 4.2%).

(a)  Non-derivative financial liabilities
The following liquidity risk disclosures reflect all contractually fixed pay-offs, repayments and interest resulting from recognised financial liabilities as at 30 
June 2011. For the other obligations the respective undiscounted cash flows for the respective upcoming fiscal years are presented. The timing of cash 
flows for liabilities is based on the contractual terms of the underlying contract.

However, where the counterparty has a choice of when the amount is paid, the liability is allocated to the earliest period in which the Group can now be 
required to pay. When the Group is committed to make amounts available in instalments, each instalment is allocated to the earliest period in which the 
Group is required to pay.

The risk implied from the values shown in the table below, reflects a balanced view of cash inflows and outflows of non-derivative financial instruments. 
Leasing obligations, trade payables and other financial liabilities mainly originate from the financing of assets used in the Group’s ongoing operations 
such as property, plant, equipment and investments in working capital (e.g. inventories and trade receivables).

Liquid non-derivative assets comprising cash and receivables are considered in the Group’s overall liquidity risk. The Group ensures that sufficient liquid 
assets are available to meet all the required short-term cash payments.

50

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

The remaining contractual maturities of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities are:

yeAR eNDeD 30 JuNe 2011

financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade and other receivables

financial liabilities

Trade and other payables

Interest bearing loans and borrowings

Net inflow/(outflow)

≤ 6
moNths
$’000

6 – 12
moNths
$’000

1 – 5
yeARs
$’000

> 5
yeARs
$’000

totAl
$’000

19,374

54,387

73,761

(57,584)

(4,748)

(62,332)

11,429

–

–

–

–

–

672

672

–

(4,690)

(4,690)

(4,690)

(153,646)

(153,646)

(152,974)

–

–

–

–

(420)

(420)

(420)

19,374

55,059

74,433

(57,584)

(163,504)

(221,088)

(146,655)

In addition to maintaining sufficient liquid assets to meet short-term payments, at balance date, the Group has available approximately $110 million of 
unused bank loan facilities available for its immediate use, subject to continued compliance with the bank loan covenants.

yeAR eNDeD 30 JuNe 2010

financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade and other receivables

financial liabilities

Trade and other payables

Interest bearing loans and borrowings

Net inflow/(outflow)

≤ 6
moNths
$’000

6 – 12
moNths
$’000

1 – 5
yeARs
$’000

> 5
yeARs
$’000

totAl
$’000

5,664

51,514

57,178

(60,406)

(37,838)

(98,244)

(41,066)

–

–

–

–

–

317

317

–

(5,995)

(5,995)

(5,995)

(185,554)

(185,554)

(185,237)

–

–

–

–

(734)

(734)

(734)

5,664

51,831

57,495

(60,406)

(230,121)

(290,527)

(233,032)

Fair value
The methods for estimating fair value are outlined in the relevant notes to the financial statements.

(b)  Derivative financial liabilities
Due to the unique characteristics and risks inherent to derivative instruments, the Group separately monitors the liquidity risk arising from transacting in 
derivative instruments.

The table below details the liquidity risk arising from the derivative liabilities held by the Group at balance date. Net settled derivative liabilities comprise 
forward interest rate contracts that are used as economic hedges of interest rate risks.

yeAR eNDeD 30 JuNe 2011

Derivative liabilities – net settled

Net inflow/(outflow)

yeAR eNDeD 30 JuNe 2010

Derivative liabilities – net settled

Net inflow/(outflow)

≤ 6
moNths
$’000

6 – 12
moNths
$’000

1 – 5
yeARs
$’000

> 5
yeARs
$’000

(670)

(670)

(726)

(726)

(1,017)

(1,017)

–

–

(697)

(697)

(1,597)

(1,597)

–

–

–

–

totAl
$’000

(1,687)

(1,687)

(3,020)

(3,020)

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

51

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

3

fiNANCiAl Risk mANAgemeNt oBJeCtives AND PoliCies (CONTINUED)

Risk exPosuRes AND ResPoNses (CONTINUED)

(v) Fair Value
The Group uses various methods in estimating the fair value of a financial instrument. The methods comprise:

Level 1 – the fair value is calculated using quoted prices in active markets.

Level 2 –  the fair value is estimated using inputs other than quoted prices included in Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (as 

prices) or indirectly (derived from prices).

Level 3 – the fair value is estimated using inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data.

The fair value of the financial instruments as well as the methods used to estimate the fair value are summarised in the table below.

quoteD mARket PRiCe 
(level 1)
$’000

vAluAtioN teChNique 
– mARket oBseRvABle 
iNPuts (level 2)
$’000

vAluAtioN teChNique  
– NoN mARket 
oBseRvABle iNPuts (level 3)
$’000

yeAR eNDeD 30 JuNe 2011

financial assets

Listed investments

Unlisted investments

financial liabilities

Derivative instruments:

Interest rate swaps

yeAR eNDeD 30 JuNe 2010

financial assets

Listed investments

Unlisted investments

financial liabilities

Derivative instruments:

Interest rate swaps

4

–

4

–

–

4

–

4

–

–

–

–

–

(1,687)

(1,687)

–

–

–

(3,020)

(3,020)

–

2,001

2,001

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

totAl
$’000

4

2,001

2,005

(1,687)

(1,687)

4

–

4

(3,020)

(3,020)

A sensitivity analysis of the valuation inputs for Level 3 balances has been provided in Note 14(iv).

Quoted market price represents the fair value determined based on quoted prices on active markets as at the reporting date without any deduction for 
transaction costs. The fair value of the listed equity investments are based on quoted market prices.

For financial instruments not quoted in active markets, the Group uses valuation techniques such as present value techniques, comparison to similar 
instruments for which market observable prices exist and other relevant models used by market participants. These valuation techniques use both 
observable and unobservable market inputs.

Financial instruments that use valuation techniques with only observable market inputs or unobservable inputs that are not significant to the overall 
valuation include interest rate swaps, forward commodity contracts and foreign exchange contracts not traded on a recognised exchange.

Reconciliation of Level 3 fair value movements:

Opening balance

Additions – as consideration received on business disposal

Closing balance

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

–

2,001

2,001

2010
$’000

–

–

–

52

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

4

iNCome AND exPeNses

iNCome AND exPeNses fRom CoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs

iNCome 

(A) 
Advertising revenue

Finance income

Other income

Breakdown of finance income:

Interest received – other persons

Breakdown of other income:

Government grants

Production revenue

Sales representation services

Rental income

Dividend income

Other revenues

(B)  fiNANCe exPeNses 
Interest expense – other persons

Effective interest rate adjustments

(C)  emPloyee BeNefit exPeNse 
Wages and salaries

Superannuation expense

Share based payments expense

Other employee benefits expense

(D)  otheR exPeNses 
Bad and doubtful debts – trade debtors

Minimum lease payments – operating leases

Realised Foreign Exchange Losses

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

250,030

231,365

420

6,548

330

4,819

256,998

236,514

420

420

1,310

488

1,294

2,338

–

1,118

6,548

11,566

(18)

11,548

41,065

3,210

665

734

45,674

311

16,942

–

330

330

543

271

1,172

1,813

25

995

4,819

11,322

(80)

11,242

39,350

3,115

16

3,285

45,766

400

17,138

7

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

53

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

5

iNCome tAx

iNCome tAx exPeNse

(A) 
The major components of income tax expense are:
statement of comprehensive income
Current income tax

Current income tax charge

Adjustments in respect of current income tax of previous years

Losses not recognised

Deferred income tax

Relating to origination and reversal of temporary differences

Adjustments in respect of deferred income tax of previous years

De-recognition of DTA

Net DTA not previously recognised due to accumulated loss position of subsidiary

Income tax expense/(benefit) on discontinuing operations

income tax expense reported in the statement of comprehensive income

(B)  AmouNts ChARgeD oR CReDiteD DiReCtly to equity
Deferred income tax related to items charged or credited directly to equity

Foreign currency translation

(C) 

 NumeRiCAl ReCoNCiliAtioN BetweeN AggRegAte tAx exPeNse ReCogNiseD iN 
the stAtemeNt of ComPReheNsive iNCome AND tAx exPeNse CAlCulAteD PeR 
the stAtutoRy iNCome tAx RAte.

A reconciliation between tax expense and the product of accounting profit before income tax multiplied by the 
Group’s appropriate income tax rate is as follows:

Profit before tax from continuing operations

(Loss) before tax from discontinuing operations

total accounting profit/(loss) before income tax

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

7,760

(933)

13

4,656

215

–

(581)

(63)

11,067

5,530

1,465

52

(3,713)

(1,025)

3,851

(1,692)

5,750

10,218

(237)

(237)

(103)

(103)

39,255

(959)

38,296

7,882

(57,958)

(50,076)

Prima facie tax expense/(benefit) on accounting profit at the Group’s statutory rate of 30% (2010: 30%)

11,489

(15,023)

Non temporary differences

Expenses not deductible for tax

Impairment expense not deductible for tax

DTA not recognised on current year tax losses

Adjustments in respect of current income tax of previous years

Income not assessable for tax

DTA on timing differences not previously recognised now brought to account

De-recognition of DTA on capital losses

DTA on income tax losses not previously recognised

Aggregate income tax expense

Aggregate income tax expense attributable to:

Continuing operations

Discontinuing operations

1,213

–

–

(719)

(354)

–

69

(568)

11,130

11,067

63

11,130

1,264

15,550

410

440

51

(1,692)

3,851

(383)

4,468

10,218

(5,750)

4,468

54

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000
CuRReNt
iNCome tAx

2011
$’000
DefeRReD
iNCome tAx

2010
$’000
Current
InCome tax

2010
$’000
DeferreD
InCome tax

(D)  ReCogNiseD DefeRReD tAx Assets AND liABilities
Opening balance

Charged to income

Charged to equity

Other payments

Closing balance

Tax expense in statement of comprehensive income

Amounts recognised in the statement of financial position:

Deferred tax asset

Deferred tax liability

57

(6,841)

(11)

3,718

(3,077)

12,093

(4,289)

248

–

8,052

11,130

8,052

–

8,052

Deferred income tax as at 30 June relates to the following:

Deferred tax liabilities

Accelerated depreciation for tax purposes

Leased assets

Prepaid expenses deductible for tax

Fair value of television licences on acquisition

Gross deferred tax liabilities

Set-off of deferred tax assets

Net deferred tax liabilities

Deferred tax assets

Employee entitlements

Provisions

Expenses not yet deductible for tax

Lease liabilities

Difference between accounting and tax building write off

Accounting depreciation not yet deductible for tax

Fair value of derivatives

Impairments of investments

Tax losses

Gross deferred tax assets

Set-off of deferred tax liabilities

Net deferred tax assets

5,286

(7,046)

91

1,726

57

9,503

2,578

12

–

12,093

4,468

12,093

–

12,093

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

–

(75)

(887)

(6,690)

(7,652)

7,652

–

1,712

195

3,070

56

1,486

191

506

7,200

1,288

15,704

(7,652)

8,052

(268)

(38)

(651)

(6,690)

(7,647)

7,647

–

1,816

2,418

3,323

–

2,401

–

906

7,384

1,492

19,740

(7,647)

12,093

(e) 
(i) 

iNCome tAx losses

 Deferred tax assets arising from tax losses of a controlled entity which at balance date are recognised as being 
highly probable of recovery. These losses relate to an entity outside the Australian Tax Consolidated Group that 
is making profits.

1,288

1,492

(ii) 

 Deferred tax assets arising from tax losses of controlled entities not recognised at reporting date as realisation 
of the benefit is not regarded as highly probable.

19,305

21,969

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

55

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

5

iNCome tAx (CONTINUED)

(f) 

tAx CoNsoliDAtioN

(i)  Members of the tax consolidated group and the tax sharing arrangements
Effective 1 July 2002, for the purposes of income taxation, Prime Media Group Limited and its 100% owned Australian resident subsidiaries formed a 
tax consolidated group. Prime Media Group Limited is the head entity of the tax consolidated group. Members of the tax consolidated group entered 
into a tax sharing arrangement in order to allocate income tax expense to the wholly owned subsidiaries on a pro-rata basis. In addition, the agreement 
provides for the allocation of income tax liabilities between the entities should the head entity default on its tax payment obligations. No amounts have 
been recognised in the financial statements in respect of this agreement on the basis that the possibility of default is remote. 

(ii) 

Tax effect accounting by members of the consolidated group

Measurement method adopted under UIG 1052 Tax Consolidation Accounting
The head entity and the controlled entities in the tax consolidated group continue to account for their own current and deferred tax amounts. The Group 
has applied the Group Allocation approach in determining the appropriate amount of current taxes and deferred taxes to allocate to members of the tax 
consolidated group. The current and deferred tax amounts are measured in a systematic manner that is consistent with the broad principles in AASB 112 
Income Taxes. The nature of the tax funding agreement is discussed further below.

In addition to its own current and deferred tax amounts, the head entity also recognises current tax liabilities (or assets) and deferred tax assets arising 
from unused tax losses and unused tax credits from controlled extras in the tax consolidated group.

Nature of the tax funding agreement
Members of the tax consolidated group have entered into a tax funding agreement. The tax funding agreement provides for the allocation of current 
taxes to members of the tax consolidated group in accordance with their taxable income for the period, while deferred taxes are allocated to members 
of the tax consolidated group in accordance with the principles of AASB 112 Income Taxes. Allocations under the tax funding agreement are made at 
the end of each half year.

The allocation of taxes under the tax funding agreement is recognised as an increase/decrease in the subsidiaries’ intercompany accounts with the tax 
consolidated group head company, Prime Media Group Limited. In accordance with UIG 1052: Tax Consolidation Accounting, the group has applied the 
“separate taxpayer within group” approach in determining the appropriate amount of current taxes to allocate to members of the tax consolidated group.

Tax effect accounting by members of the consolidated group

PRime meDiA gRouP limiteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

Prime Media Group Limited has recognised the following amounts as tax-consolidation contribution adjustments:

Total increase to inter-company assets of Prime Media Group Limited

12,483

5,907

(g)  tAxAtioN of fiNANCiAl ARRANgemeNts (tofA)
Legislation is in place which changes the tax treatment of financial arrangements, including the tax treatment of hedging transactions. The Group has 
assessed the potential impact of these changes on the Group tax position. No impact has been recognised and no adjustments have been made to the 
deferred tax and income tax balances at 30 June 2011 (2010: $Nil).

56

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

6 DisCoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs

(A)  DetAils of oPeRAtioNs DisPoseD, CloseD DowN AND helD foR sAle

mooNlight CiNemA
On 1 October 2010, the Group completed the sale of Moonlight Cinema, its Australian outdoor cinema operation, to Amalgamated Holdings Limited for 
a disposal sale consideration of $1,627,877, net of selling costs.

oN site BRoADCAstiNg
(1)  On 9 July 2010, the Group completed the sale of its On Site Broadcasting business in New Zealand to Sky Network Television Limited for total 

consideration of A$11,130,375, net of selling costs. The deferred consideration is receivable over a period of 4 years to 30 June 2014 and the amount 
earned is contingent upon the amount of profit earned under various contracts transferred as part of the sale. 

 The consideration comprised of the following:

Cash consideration

Deferred contingent consideration, at fair value

total consideration

10,565,375

565,000

$11,130,375

As at 30 June 2011 the Company revised the fair value of the deferred contingent consideration up by $1,181,000, on completion of a detailed review of 
the forecast profits expected from the contracts transferred as part of the sale.

(2)  On 28 October 2010, the Group completed the sale of its On Site Broadcasting business in Australia to Gearhouse Broadcast Pty Ltd for a total 

consideration of $10,314,993, net of selling costs.

The consideration comprised of the following:

Cash consideration

Shares issued in Gearhouse Broadcast Pty Limited (unlisted) at fair value

Deferred contingent consideration, at fair value

total consideration

8,314,993

2,000,000

–

$10,314,993

A component of the sale consideration is a $3,000,000 subordinated loan advanced by the Company to the purchaser and repayable between 31 
December 2012 and 31 December 2014. The loan repayment amount is contingent upon the financial performance of the business from the date of 
the sale to 31 December 2014. As at 30 June 2011 the loan repayment amount had been formally reduced to $1,187,005. The company is carrying this 
deferred contingent consideration receivable at a fair value of nil.

PRime DigitAl meDiA
Effective 30 June 2011, the Company exited the Prime Digital Media business and has disclosed the results of the Prime Digital Media business as 
discontinuing operations.

televisioN PRoDuCtioN
On 20 November 2009, the board of directors entered an agreement to transfer the existing production rights for current developments to Beyond 
International. The television production operations were wound up following the transfer to Beyond International, which was completed on 18 January 2010.

(B) 

 fiNANCiAl PeRfoRmANCe of oPeRAtioNs DisPoseD,  
CloseD DowN oR helD foR sAle

Revenue

Expenses

loss attributable to discontinuing operations before tax 

Income tax (expense)/benefit

loss attributable to discontinuing operations after tax

Minority interest in discontinued operations

Loss from discontinuing operations attributable to members of parent entity

loss per share (cents per share)

Basic from discontinued operations

Diluted from discontinued operations

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

7,098

(8,057)

(959)

(63)

(1,022)

–

(1,022)

(0.3)

(0.3)

39,062

(97,020)

(57,958)

5,750

(52,208)

85

(52,123)

(14.3)

(14.3)

Discontinuing operations includes Broadcast Production Services, On Site Broadcasting, Moonlight Cinema, Prime Media Singapore and Prime Digital Media.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

57

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

6 DisCoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs (CONTINUED)

(C)  Assets AND liABilities – helD foR sAle oPeRAtioNs
Non-current assets

Property, plant & equipment

Intangibles – goodwill

total non-current assets

total assets

Current liabilities

Interest bearing liabilities

total Current liabilities

Net assets held for sale

(D)  CAsh flow iNfoRmAtioN – DisCoNtiNueD oPeRAtioNs
Net cash (outflow) from operating activities

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from investing activities

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities

Net cash generated by discontinued operations

(e)  loss oN DisPosAl
Cash

Shares received at fair value

Fair value of deferred consideration

total disposal consideration

Less net assets disposed of

loss on disposal before income tax

Income tax expense

loss on disposal after income tax

(f)  Net CAsh iNflow fRom DisPosAl
Cash and cash equivalents consideration

Less cash and cash equivalents balance disposed of

Reflected in the consolidated statement of cash flows

7 eARNiNgs PeR shARe

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

37,791

2,097

39,888

39,888

(24,162)

(24,162)

15,726

(2,491)

(10,529)

13,488

468

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(7,608)

18,256

(7,309)

3,339

2011
$’000

20,508

2,000

565

23,073

(23,656)

(583)

240

(343)

20,508

–

20,508

Basic earnings per share amounts are calculated by dividing net profit for the year attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent by the weighted 
average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year.

Diluted earnings per share amounts are calculated by dividing the net profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent by the weighted average 
number of ordinary shares that would be on issue on the conversion of all the potentially dilutive ordinary shares into ordinary shares.

The following reflects the income and share data used in the calculations of basic and diluted earnings per share:

(A)  eARNiNgs useD iN CAlCulAtiNg eARNiNgs PeR shARe
Net Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent from continuing operations

Net loss attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent from discontinuing operations

Net Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent

earnings/(losses) used in calculating basic and diluted earnings per share

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

28,188

(1,022)

27,166

27,166

(2,336)

(52,208)

(54,544)

(54,544)

58

 
NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

(B)  weighteD AveRAge NumBeR of shARes
Weighted average number of ordinary shares used in calculating basic earnings per share:

Effect of dilution:

Share options

NumBeR of
shARes
2011

number of
shares
2010

366,330,303

363,522,662

–

–

Adjusted weighted average number of ordinary shares used in calculating diluted earnings per share 

366,330,303

363,522,662

There are nil share options (2010: 5,250,000) excluded from the calculations of diluted earnings per share that could potentially dilute basic earnings per 
share in the future because they are anti-dilutive.

There have been no transactions involving ordinary shares or potential ordinary shares that would significantly change the number of ordinary shares or 
potential ordinary shares outstanding between the reporting date and the completion of the financial statements.

(C) 

iNfoRmAtioN oN the ClAssifiCAtioN of seCuRities

(i)  oPtioNs
No options granted in year.

To calculate earnings per share amounts for the core continuing operations, the weighted average number of ordinary shares for both basic and diluted 
amounts is as per the table above. The following table provides the profit figure used as the numerator:

(D)  PRofit fRom CoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs BefoRe sigNifiCANt items
Reported profit/(loss) after tax from continuing operations (refer statement of comprehensive income)

Fair value change in derivatives

Fair value change in receivable – deferred contingent consideration

Transfer of foreign currency translation reserve to profit and loss

Impairment of radio broadcasting licences

Gain on sale of investments

Impairment of television program rights

Staff redundancies

CEO termination expenses

destra administration costs

Impairment on loan to associate

Restructuring

Once off increase to employee entitlements resulting from award change

Income tax expense/(benefit) related to significant items

Profit after tax from continuing operations before significant items attributable  
to members of Prime media group limited

8 DiviDeNDs PAiD AND PRoPoseD

Current year interim

(A)  ReCogNiseD AmouNts
Declared and paid during the year
(i) 
Franked dividends 2.1 cents per share (2010: 1.2 cents) – ordinary shares
(ii) 
Franked dividends 1.4 cents per share (2010: 1.0 cents) – ordinary shares

Previous year final

(B)  uNReCogNiseD AmouNts
(i) 
Franked dividends 2.4 cent per share (2010: 1.4 cents) – ordinary shares

Current year final

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

28,188

(1,333)

(1,181)

995

–

–

–

198

–

–

–

–

–

(2,336)

(1,518)

–

–

12,529

(921)

1,302

718

1,871

226

4,384

2,207

626

340

(1,353)

27,207

17,735

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

7,693

5,129

12,822

4,382

3,633

8,015

8,792

5,129

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

59

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

8 DiviDeNDs PAiD AND PRoPoseD (CONTINUED)

(C)  fRANkiNg CReDit BAlANCe
the amount of franking credits available for the subsequent financial year are:
Franking account balance as at the end of the financial year at 30% (2010: 30%)
Franking credits that will arise from the payment of income tax payable as at the end of the financial year
Franking debits that will arise from the payment of dividends as at the end of the financial year 

the amount of franking credits available for future reporting periods:
Impact on the franking account of dividends proposed or declared before the financial report  
was authorised for issue but not recognised as a distribution to equity holders during the period

PAReNt

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

26,685
2,608
–
29,293

(3,768)

25,525

27,823
(393)
–
27,430

(2,198)

25,232

(D)  tAx RAtes
The tax rate at which paid dividends have been franked is 30% (2010: 30%). Dividends proposed will be franked at the rate of 30% (2010: 30%).

9 CAsh AND CAsh equivAleNts

Cash balance comprises:

Cash at bank and on hand

Closing cash balance

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

19,374

19,374

2010
$’000

5,664

5,664

Cash at bank earns interest at floating rates based on daily bank deposit rates. The carrying amounts of cash and cash equivalents represent fair value.

At 30 June 2011 the Group had available $110 million (2010: $100 million) of un-drawn committed borrowing facilities in respect of which all conditions 
precedent had been met.

(A) 

 ReCoNCiliAtioN of the Net PRofit AfteR tAx  
to the Net CAsh flows fRom oPeRAtioNs

Net profit/(loss) after income tax
Adjustment for:
Depreciation and amortisation 
Amortisation of program rights
Effective interest rate adjustments
Provision for doubtful debts
Net loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Gain on sale of financial asset
Transfer of foreign currency translation reserve to profit and loss
Net gain MTM derivatives
Impairment of intangibles and goodwill
Impairment of property, plant & equipment
Impairment of investments in associates
Share of losses of associates
Share based payments expense

Changes in assets and liabilities
(Increase) in receivables
Decrease/(increase) in deferred tax assets
(Increase) in prepayments
(Decrease) in creditors
Increase in tax provision
(Decrease) in deferred tax liability
(Decrease) in interest bearing liabilities
(Decrease)/increase in other provisions
Net cash flow from operating activities

60

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

27,166

(54,544)

10,190
832
–
314
656
(34)
995
(1,333)
–
–
–
586
665

(2,034)
3,849
(310)
(2,259)
3,564
–
(2,070)
(6,358)
34,419

18,330
3,442
84
542
225
(922)
1,032
(1,517)
52,461
7,863
4,384
1,601
16

(174)
(2,425)
(1,465)
(1,563)
5,332
(163)
–
627
33,166

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

10 tRADe AND otheR ReCeivABles

CuRReNt
Trade receivables
Allowance for impairment loss

Deferred contingent consideration
Other receivables
Related party receivables
Loans to executives
Other related parties
Carrying amount of trade and other receivables

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

47,944
(652)
47,292
1,285
4,446

130
1,234
54,387

48,843
(875)
47,968
–
3,424

122
–
51,514

(A)  AllowANCe foR imPAiRmeNt loss
Trade receivables are carried at original invoice amount less an allowance for any uncollectible debts. Credit terms for advertisers, generally 30 – 45 days, are 
extended based upon an assessment of the credit standing of each customer. An allowance for impairment loss is made when there is objective evidence that 
the Group will not be able to collect the debt. Bad debts are written off when identified. No individual amount within the impairment allowance is material.

Due to the short term nature of these receivables, their carrying value is assumed to approximate their fair value.

The maximum exposure to credit risk is the fair value of receivables. Collateral is not held as security, nor is it the Group’s policy to transfer (on-sell) 
receivables to special purpose entities.

Movement in the provision for impairment loss in relation to trade receivables was as follows:

At July 1
Charge for the year
Amounts written off
At June 30

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

875
20
(243)
652

2010
$’000

629
686
(440)
875

At 30 June, the ageing analysis of trade receivables is as follows:

2011
2010

totAl

47,944
48,843

0–30
DAys

24,281
25,367

31–60
DAys

21,422
21,172

61–90
DAys PDNi*

61–90
DAys Ci*

+91
DAys PDNi*

+91
DAys Ci*

999
1,013

13
56

733
416

496
819

*  Considered impaired (‘CI’), Past due not impaired (‘PDNI’)

Receivables past due but not considered impaired incorporate those customers on payment plans or those with a good payment history for which we 
expect payment in the short term. For each client, credit has been stopped until full payment is made. Each operating unit has been in direct contact with 
the relevant debtor and is satisfied that payment will be received in full.

Other balances within trade and other receivables do not contain impaired assets and are not past due. It is expected that these other balances will be 
received when due.

(B)  RelAteD PARty ReCeivABles
For terms and conditions of related party receivables refer to notes 31 and 32.

(C)  foReigN exChANge AND iNteRest RAte Risk
Detail regarding foreign exchange and interest rate risk exposure is disclosed in note 3.

NoN-CuRReNt
Deferred contingent consideration
Related party receivables
Loans to executives
Other related parties
Carrying amount of non-current receivables

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

487

140
45
672

–

270
47
317

Related parties receivables are interest bearing and have no fixed repayment terms. The directors of the parent entity review the interest rates applicable 
to these receivables on an annual basis, based on the prevailing cost of debt incurred by the parent entity.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

61

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

10 tRADe AND otheR ReCeivABles (CONTINUED)

All amounts are receivable in Australian dollars and are not considered past due or impaired.

For the terms and conditions relating to KMP refer to note 32.

(A)  fAiR vAlue AND CReDit Risk
The fair values of non-current receivables approximate their carrying value.

(B)  foReigN exChANge AND iNteRest RAte Risk
Detail regarding foreign exchange and interest rate risk exposure is disclosed in note 3.

(C)  CReDit Risk
The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date is the higher of the carrying value and fair value of each class of receivables.  
No collateral is held as security.

11 otheR Assets

CuRReNt
Work in progress
Prepayments

NoN-CuRReNt
Prepayments

12 iNvestmeNts iN AssoCiAtes

iNvestmeNt DetAils

(A) 
unlisted
Mildura Digital Television Pty Limited (refer to note 19)
Prime Digitalworks Pty Limited
West Digital Television Pty Limited
West Digital Television No2 Pty Limited
West Digital Television No3 Pty Limited
West Digital Television No4 Pty Limited
WA SatCo Pty Limited
Broadcast Transmission Services Pty Limited
total investments in Associates

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

–
2,001
2,001

2010
$’000

65
2,397
2,462

2,332

1,561

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

80
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
80

(B) 

 the CoNsoliDAteD eNtity hAs A mAteRiAl 
iNteRest iN the followiNg eNtities:

unlisted
Mildura Digital Television Pty Limited
destra Corporation Limited(1)
Prime Digitalworks Pty Limited(2)
West Digital Television Pty Limited
West Digital Television No2 Pty Limited
West Digital Television No3 Pty Limited
West Digital Television No4 Pty Limited
WA SatCo Pty Limited
Broadcast Transmission Services Pty Limited

owNeRshiP iNteRest

CoNtRiButioN to Net PRofit

2011
%

2010
%

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

50%
44%
100%
50%
50%
50%
50%
50%
33%

50%
44%
100%
50%
50%
50%
50%
–
33%

(586)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(586)

(425)
–
(1,176)
–
–
–
–
–
–
(1,601)

(1)  The group’s investment in destra Corporation Limited was impaired to Nil during 2009. As such no further share of losses are taken up in the Group accounts.
(2)  On 30 June 2010 Prime Digitalworks Pty Limited became a wholly owned subsidiary. Prior to this date the ownership interest was 33% and this investment was classified as an 

investment in associate.

62

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

(C) 

 movemeNts iN the CARRyiNg AmouNt of the gRouP’s  
iNvestmeNt iN AssoCiAtes

At July 1

Loan funds advanced(1)

Share of losses after income tax

Provision for impairment losses

Provision for loan funds still to be paid to associate (refer to note 19)

At June 30

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

80

299

(586)

–

207

–

4,299

1,766

(1,601)

(4,384)

–

80

(1)  Reflects loan funds advanced to associates under short term loan arrangement or in accordance with requirements of shareholder agreements. These payments are deemed 

to be part of the Investment in Associates for the purposes of equity accounting.

imPAiRmeNt

(D) 
In 2010 a provision for impairment loss was recognised to the extent as disclosed above. Due to the ongoing losses being incurred by Prime Digitalworks 
Pty Limited, management of Prime Media Group Limited reviewed the recoverability of the loan to this associate. The assessment of the fair value of the 
loans to the associate was $Nil which gave rise to an impairment of $4,384,000.

(e)  summARiseD fiNANCiAl iNfoRmAtioN
The following table illustrates summarised financial information relating to the Group’s associates:

extracts from associates’ balance sheets:

Current assets

Non-current assets

Current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Net assets

share of the associates net assets accounted for using the equity method:

Net assets

extracts from associates’ statements of comprehensive income:

Revenue

Net losses

share of the associates profits or losses accounted for using the equity method:

Loss before income tax

Income tax expense

Loss after income tax

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

460

483

943

(2,345)

–

(2,345)

(1,402)

109

490

599

(1,457)

–

(1,457)

(858)

(701)

(429)

936

(1,172)

(586)

–

(586)

1,878

(4,388)

(1,601)

–

(1,601)

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

63

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

13 iNvestmeNts iN suBsiDiARies AND fiNANCiAl Assets

CloseD gRouP ClAss oRDeR DisClosuRes

eNtities suBJeCt to ClAss oRDeR Relief
Pursuant to Class Order 98/1418, relief has been granted to Prime Television (Holdings) Pty Limited, Prime Television (Southern) Pty Limited, Prime 
Television (Victoria) Pty Limited, Prime Television (Northern) Pty Limited, Golden West Network Pty Limited, Prime Television Investments Pty Limited and 
Prime Radio (Holdings) Pty Limited from the Corporations Act 2001 requirements for preparation, audit and lodgement of their financial reports.

As a condition of the Class Order, Prime Media Group Limited and its 100% owned Australian resident subsidiaries entered into a Deed of Cross 
Guarantee on 17 October 2006 (the “Closed Group”). The effect of the deed is that Prime Media Group Limited has guaranteed to pay any deficiency in 
the event of winding up of any of the controlled entities within the Closed Group. The controlled entities within the Closed Group, listed below, have also 
given a similar guarantee in the event that Prime Media Group Limited is wound up.

CouNtRy of
iNCoRPoRAtioN

equity iNteRest

2011
%

2010
%

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

NAme

Prime Television (Holdings) Pty Limited

Zamojill Pty Limited

Prime Television (Southern) Pty Limited

Prime Television (Northern) Pty Limited

Prime Television (Victoria) Pty Limited

Prime Properties (Albury) Pty Limited

Prime Television Digital Media Pty Limited

Prime Television (Investments) Pty Limited

Golden West Network Pty Limited

Mining Television Network Pty Limited

Telepro Pty Limited

Golden West Satellite Communications Pty Limited

135 Nominees Pty Limited

Mid-Western Television Pty Limited

Geraldton Telecasters Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Cairns) Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Townsville) Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Barrier Reef) Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Rockhampton) Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Gladstone) Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Mackay) Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Holdings) Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Cairns-AM) Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Mackay-AM) Pty Limited

AMI Radio Pty Limited

Hot 91 Pty Limited

Prime Digital Media Pty Limited

Fireback Digital Pty Limited

Prime Media Developments Pty Limited

Prime Digitalworks Pty Limited

Prime Media Broadcasting Pty Limited

Prime Media Communications Pty Limited

Prime Growth Media Pty Limited

Prime Media Group Services Pty Limited

POP Digital Media Pty Limited

64

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

The consolidated statement of comprehensive income and statement of financial position of the entities which are members of the “Closed Group’ 
are as follows: 

(A)  CoNsoliDAteD stAtemeNt of ComPReheNsive iNCome 

Operating profit/(loss) before income tax

Income tax expense attributable to operating profit/(loss)

Operating profit/(loss) after tax

Accumulated losses at beginning of the financial year

Dividends provided for or paid

Accumulated losses at end of the financial period

(B)  CoNsoliDAteD stAtemeNt of fiNANCiAl PositioN

Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade and other receivables

Intangible assets

Prepayments

Current tax assets

total current assets

Non-current assets

Receivables

Investments in associates

Investments in available-for-sale financial assets

Other financial assets and subsidiaries

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Deferred tax assets

Other assets

total non-current assets

totAl Assets

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Interest bearing loans and borrowings

Current tax liabilities

Provisions

Derivative financial instruments

total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Interest bearing loans and borrowings

Provisions

total non-current liabilities

totAl liABilities

Net Assets

equity

Parent entity interest

Contributed equity

Reserves

Accumulated losses

totAl equity

CloseD gRouP

2011
$’000

37,870

(12,041)

25,829

(78,786)

(12,822)

(65,779)

2010
$’000

(17,304)

(7,402)

(24,706)

(46,065)

(8,015)

(78,786)

CloseD gRouP

2011
$’000

18,749

52,107

616

1,909

–

73,381

2010
$’000

3,821

48,665

832

2,124

396

55,838

36,585

37,057

–

7

118,093

54,328

224,519

4,308

2,332

440,172

513,553

80

7

117,933

56,053

225,284

7,448

1,560

445,422

501,260

56,640

52,997

627

3,495

2,255

1,687

64,704

49,729

152,823

433

202,985

267,689

245,864

310,262

1,381

(65,779)

245,864

381

–

9,023

3,020

65,421

35,960

165,228

496

201,684

267,105

234,155

310,262

2,679

(78,786)

234,155

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

65

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

14 iNvestmeNts – AvAilABle-foR-sAle fiNANCiAl Assets

investments at fair value:

Available for sale financial assets:

Shares in uncontrolled entities (listed) (i)

investments at cost:

Shares in uncontrolled entities (unlisted) (ii)

investments at fair value:

Shares in uncontrolled entities (unlisted) (iii)

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

4

3,133

2,001

5,138

4

3,133

–

3,137

Available-for-sale investments consist of investments in ordinary shares, and therefore have no fixed maturity date or coupon rate.

listeD shARes 

(i) 
The fair value of the listed available-for-sale investments has been determined directly by reference to published price quotations in an active market. 

There are no individually material investments.

(ii)  uNlisteD shARes At Cost
Investments in shares of unlisted entities are carried at cost where fair value cannot be reliably measured. The financial instruments held are shares of an 
entity that has a small shareholder base and a relatively stable share register with few exchanges of shareholdings

Management has reviewed the current trading performance and future projections of the entity. Based on these projections and other external factors 
likely to affect the ongoing performance of the entity management are of the belief that the carrying value of the investment is fair value. Based on the 
current expectations management believe the downturn in performance would have to be greater than 50% of current levels before impairment of the 
investment would occur.

(iii)  uNlisteD shARes At fAiR vAlue
The fair value of the unlisted available-for-sale investments has been estimated using valuation techniques based on assumptions, which are outlined 
in note 2(F), that are not supported by observable market prices or rates. Management believes the estimated fair value resulting from the valuation 
techniques and recorded in the statement of financial position and the related changes in fair value recorded in other comprehensive income are 
reasonable and the most appropriate at the reporting date. A reconciliation of the movement during the year is as follows:

Investments at fair value:

Opening balance

Net valuation gains

Additions – as consideration received on business disposal

Disposals

Closing balance

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

–

–

2,001

–

2,001

2010
$’000

–

–

–

–

–

(iv)  vAluAtioN seNsitivity
Management has estimated the potential effect of using reasonably possible alternatives as inputs to the valuation models and has quantified this as a 
reduction in fair value of approximately $689,000 using less favourable assumptions and an increase in fair value of approximately $742,000 using more 
favourable assumptions.

66

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

15 PRoPeRty, PlANt AND equiPmeNt

Freehold land – at cost

Leasehold land – at cost(i)

total land

Buildings on freehold land – at cost

Less: Accumulated depreciation

Buildings on leasehold land – at cost(i)

Less Accumulated amortisation

Buildings on freehold land – at recoverable value

Less: Accumulated depreciation

total Buildings

Leasehold Improvements – at cost

Less: Accumulated amortisation

total leasehold improvements

Plant and Equipment – at cost

Less: Accumulated depreciation and impairment

total Plant and equipment

Plant and Equipment under lease - at cost

Less: Accumulated amortisation

total Plant and equipment under lease

Motor Vehicles – at cost

Less: Accumulated depreciation

total motor vehicles

totAl wRitteN DowN AmouNt

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

916

197

1,113

2,049

(1,159)

890

10,286

(3,051)

7,235

2,112

(542)

1,570

9,695

3,877

(1,584)

2,293

2010
$’000

1,147

197

1,344

3,324

(1,716)

1,608

10,146

(2,794)

7,352

2,162

(488)

1,674

10,634

3,593

(1,321)

2,272

143,726

(106,351)

37,375

152,218

(113,781)

38,437

4,935

(1,102)

3,833

61

(36)

25

4,451

(861)

3,590

79

(48)

31

54,334

56,308

(i) 

Includes land located in the Australian Capital Territory, under the ACT legislation, the land has a 99 year lease period, and also includes Leasehold Strata Units located in 
Sydney, which are held under a 99 year lease.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

67

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

15 PRoPeRty, PlANt AND equiPmeNt (CONTINUED)

(A)  ReCoNCiliAtioNs
Reconciliations of the carrying amounts of property, plant and equipment at the beginning and end of the current financial year.

CoNsoliDAteD

freehold land 
Carrying amount at beginning
Disposals
Classification transfer

leasehold land
total land
Buildings on freehold land
Carrying amount at beginning
Additions
Classification transfer
Disposals
Depreciation expense

Buildings on leasehold land
Carrying amount at beginning
Additions
Classification transfer
Disposals
Depreciation expense

total Buildings
leasehold improvements
Carrying amount at beginning
Additions
Classification transfer
Disposals
Depreciation expense
Reclassification to assets held for sale
total leasehold improvements
Plant and equipment
Carrying amount at beginning
Additions
Classification transfer(1)
Disposals
Depreciation expense
Impairment expense(2)
Reclassification to assets held for sale(2)
Foreign currency movements 
total Plant and equipment
Plant and equipment under lease
Carrying amount at beginning
Additions
Disposals
Amortisation expense
Foreign currency movements 
Reclassification to assets held for sale(2)
total Plant and equipment under lease
total Plant and equipment
motor vehicles
Carrying amount at beginning
Additions
Classification transfer
Disposals
Depreciation expense
total motor vehicles

2011
$’000

1,147
(231)
–
916
197
1,113

3,282
–
–
(710)
(112)
2,460

7,352
140
–
–
(257)
7,235
9,695

2,272
296
5
(11)
(269)
–
2,293

38,437
9,281
(81)
(1,054)
(9,208)
–
–
–
37,375

3,590
645
(98)
(304)
–
–
3,833
41,208

31
9
–
(9)
(6)
25

2010
$’000

1,142
–
5
1,147
197
1,344

3,397
79
(33)
(17)
(144)
3,282

7,683
4
(85)
–
(250)
7,352
10,634

2,529
64
11
–
(276)
(56)
2,272

55,737
26,660
68
(252)
(15,199)
(7,863)
(21,151)
437
38,437

22,749
194
34
(2,358)
(445)
(16,584)
3,590
42,027

150
6
(1)
–
(124)
31

(1)  The majority of the current year classification transfer balance has been reclassified as intangibles (refer to note 16).
(2)  During 2010 management assessed the recoverability of assets owned by the Group used in the operation of the digital out of home advertising networks operated by Prime 
Digital Media Pty Limited. The board made the decision during the reporting period to close down the ‘Retravision Network’. As a result of this decision the assets relating 
to this network were impaired to $Nil. The total impairment expense arising from this event was $3,815,000. As at 30 June 2010 the assets of On Site Broadcasting and 
Moonlight Cinemas were reclassified as held for sale. Management undertook an impairment assessment of these assets based on fair value less cost to sell. This gave rise to 
an impairment of the On Site Broadcasting plant and equipment totalling $4,048,000.

68

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

(B)  Assets PleDgeD As seCuRity
All plant and equipment under lease is pledged as security for the associated lease liabilities.

(C)  Assets helD foR sAle
As at 30 June 2010 all assets of the Broadcast Production Services Group were re-classified as held for sale. This comprised:

Leasehold Improvements

Plant and equipment

Plant and equipment under lease

Motor vehicles

Total property, plant and equipment re-classified as held for sale

As at 30 June 2010 the following lease liabilities were directly associated with assets classified as held for sale (refer to note 25):

Liabilities directly associated with assets classified as held for sale

16 gooDwill AND iNtANgiBle Assets

2010
$’000

56

21,151

16,584

–

37,791

24,162

CuRReNt
Program rights – At cost

NoN-CuRReNt
Goodwill on acquisition

Broadcast licences and associated rights – At cost

Program rights – At cost

Web site development costs – At amortised cost

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

616

616

3,657

219,810

1,200

27

2010
$’000

832

832

3,657

219,810

1,817

–

224,694

225,284

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

69

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

16 gooDwill AND iNtANgiBle Assets (CONTINUED)

ReCoNCiliAtioNs 
goodwill on Acquisition

Carrying amount at beginning

Additions

Assets classified as held for sale

Impairment losses(i)

Broadcast licences

Carrying amount at beginning

Impairment losses

Program Rights

Carrying amount at beginning

Amortisation expense

Impairment charge

television format Rights

Carrying amount at beginning

Additions

Disposals

Impairment charge

web site Development Costs

Carrying amount at beginning

Classification transfer

Amortisation expense

Disposals

(i)  These impairment losses relate to the following CGU’s:

On Site Broadcasting

Moonlight Cinema

Prime Digital Media Pty Limited

Prime Digitalworks Pty Limited

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

3,657

–

–

–

3,657

219,810

–

219,810

2,649

(833)

–

1,816

–

–

–

–

–

–

79

(32)

(20)

27

44,286

1,400

(2,097)

(39,932)

3,657

232,339

(12,529)

219,810

5,650

(1,699)

(1,302)

2,649

440

–

–

(440)

–

–

–

–

–

–

225,310

226,116

–

–

–

–

–

24,376

562

13,593

1,401

39,932

(A)  DesCRiPtioN of the gRouP’s iNtANgiBle Assets AND gooDwill

BRoADCAst liCeNCes

(i) 
Television and Radio broadcast licences have been acquired through business combinations and consist of the right to broadcast television and radio 
services to specific market areas. The licences are carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. The licences are subject to renewal by broadcasting 
authorities in Australia at no significant cost to the Company. The directors have no reason to believe the licences will not be renewed at the end of their 
current legal terms.

PRogRAm Rights

(ii) 
Program Rights represent the purchased rights to broadcast certain programs at some time in the future. These program rights are amortised to the profit 
and loss over the term of the contract to which the rights relate. The carrying value of the rights is cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment 
losses.

(iii)  gooDwill
After initial recognition, goodwill acquired in a business combination is measured at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is not 
amortised but is subject to impairment testing on an annual basis or whenever there is indication of impairment (refer to section (B) of this note).

70

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

imPAiRmeNt testiNg of gooDwill AND iNtANgiBle Assets with iNDefiNite lives

(B) 
Broadcast licences acquired through business combinations have been allocated to the following cash-generating units for impairment testing as follows:

•	 Television broadcasting unit; and
•	 Radio broadcasting unit.

Goodwill acquired through business combinations has been allocated to the following cash–generating units for impairment testing as follows:

•	 Television broadcasting unit; and
•	 Radio broadcasting unit.

televisioN BRoADCAstiNg uNit

(i) 
On an annual basis management undertakes an assessment of the carrying value of its television broadcasting unit’s intangible assets, which consist of 
both television broadcast licences and goodwill, to test for impairment. On an annual basis management undertakes a value in use calculation using 
cashflow projections as at 31 May 2011 based on financial budgets approved by management covering a 5 year period. The long term forecasts are 
generated using a terminal growth rate of 4%. The discount rate applied to the cash flow projections is 11.75% (14.96% pre tax). The DCF valuation of the 
intangibles assets gives a recoverable amount in excess of the current carrying value.

On a bi-annual basis the Group engages an independent valuer to assess the recoverable amount of its television broadcast licences. The most recent 
valuation was undertaken in September 2010. This valuation supported the carrying values of the television unit’s intangible assets.

(ii)  RADio BRoADCAstiNg uNit
On an annual basis management undertakes an assessment of the carrying value of its radio broadcasting unit’s intangible assets, which consist of both 
radio broadcast licences and goodwill, to test for impairment. On an annual basis management undertakes a value in use calculation using cash flow 
projections as at 31 May 2011 based on financial budgets approved by management covering a 5 year period. The long term forecasts are generated 
using a terminal growth rate of 4%.

The discount rate applied to the cash flow projections is 11.75% (14.87% pre tax). The DCF valuation of the intangibles assets gives a recoverable amount 
in excess of the current carrying value.

On a bi-annual basis the Group engages an independent valuer to assess the recoverable amount of its radio broadcast licences. The most recent 
valuation was undertaken in September 2010. This valuation supported the carrying values of the radio unit’s intangible assets.

(iii)  televisioN PRogRAm Rights
During the current reporting period the group has reviewed the carrying value of the television program rights it holds. These rights were assessed 
against the likely future revenues earned from their use over the remaining life of the rights period. The forecast cash flows arising from the exploitation of 
these rights have been estimated using historical experience and established patterns over the life of the contract. 

Carrying amount of intangibles allocated to each of the cash generating units

Television Broadcasting Licences

Radio Broadcasting Licences

Broadcast licences

Radio broadcasting

Television broadcasting 

goodwill on Acquisition

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

182,963

36,847

219,810

175

3,482

3,657

182,963

36,847

219,810

175

3,482

3,657

(C)  seNsitivity of AssumPtioNs
Television and radio broadcasting are largely fixed cost businesses, so variations in the financial performance are driven by changes in revenue. The entity 
has sophisticated revenue tracking systems that allow management to track current and future revenues on a daily basis which allows actions to be taken 
to combat downward trends in revenues early.

Both television and radio broadcasting is closely regulated in Australia and as such new competitors can only enter the market space on issue of new 
licences by the national government after extensive reviews. Audience habits tend to change relatively slowly so viewing and listening shares and 
advertising revenue shares can be budgeted with a reasonable degree of accuracy. The economic conditions are monitored closely for indicators that 
could influence the overall level of advertising spending to change significantly.

The most significant area of risk for the economic entity and its cash generating units are those that affect the broadcasting industry as a whole. These 
risks are monitored closely by management.

televisioN BRoADCAstiNg

(i) 
For the television broadcasting CGU, the current recoverable value exceeds its current carrying value by more than $250,000,000. 

There are no key assumptions that could reasonably vary and result in recoverable amounts below carrying value.

(ii)  RADio BRoADCAstiNg
For the radio broadcasting CGU, the current recoverable value approximates carrying value. The valuation of the radio broadcasting is very sensitive 
to any negative movements of the assumptions used in this valuation model. Any negative movements in the assumption are likely to give rise to 
impairment charges.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

71

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

17 tRADe AND otheR PAyABles

CuRReNt
Trade payables(i)

Accrued expenses

Accrued employee leave entitlements

(i) Trade payables are non-interest bearing and are normally settled on 30 day terms.

(A) fAiR vAlues
Due to the short term nature of these payables, their carrying value is assumed to approximate their fair value.

(B) iNteRest RAte, foReigN exChANge AND liquiDity Risk
Information regarding interest rate, foreign exchange and liquidity risk exposure is set out in note 3.

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

19,995

32,512

5,077

57,584

2010
$’000

16,206

38,464

5,736

60,406

NoN-CuRReNt
Accrued expenses

18 iNteRest-BeARiNg loANs AND BoRRowiNgs

CuRReNt
Obligations under finance lease contracts (note 25(F))

NoN-CuRReNt
Obligations under finance lease contracts (note 25(F))

$260 million secured bank loan

(i) 

teRms AND CoNDitioNs

–

–

68

68

CoNsoliDAteD

mAtuRity

2012

2011
$’000

627

627

2013 – 2021

2013

2,799

150,024

152,823

2010
$’000

408

408

3,057

162,144

165,201

BANk loAN fACility
The bank loan has been drawn down under a $260 million Debenture Subscription Facility with a term of 5 years. The facility is secured by a charge over 
the assets of the borrower group comprising all wholly owned entities in Australia and New Zealand, but excluding Broadcast Production Services Pty 
Limited and its subsidiaries. Interest is charged at BBSY plus a margin between 0.5% and 0.9%. The loan is repayable in full on expiry on 26 July 2012.

The Company has been working with its bankers to secure a longer term financing arrangement. On 26 August 2011 the Company secured a commitment 
from its bankers to provide a $200 million bank loan facility with a term of 4 years, repayable in full on expiry. Interest will be charged at a rate of BBSY 
plus a margin of between 1.70% and 2.60%. Formal documentation is expected to be executed on 30 September 2011.

(A)  fAiR vAlues
The carrying amount of the Group’s current and non-current borrowings approximates their fair value. The fair values have been calculated by discounting 
the expected future cash flows at prevailing market interest rates varying from 5.5% to 8.0% (2009: 5.5% to 8.0%), depending on the type of borrowing.

The parent entity and certain controlled entities have potential financial liabilities which may arise from certain contingencies disclosed in Note 26. 
However the directors do not expect those potential financial liabilities to crystallise into obligations and therefore financial liabilities disclosed in the 
above table are the directors’ estimate of amounts that will be payable by the Group. No material losses are expected and as such, the fair values 
disclosed are the directors’ estimate of amounts that will be payable by the Group.

iNteRest RAte, foReigN exChANge AND liquiDity Risk
(B) 
Details regarding interest rate, foreign exchange and liquidity risk are disclosed in note 3.

(C)  DefAults AND BReAChes
During the current and prior years, there were no defaults or breaches on any of the loans.

72

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

19 PRovisioNs

CuRReNt
Restructuring

Directors’ retiring provision

Onerous contracts

Provision for loan to associate

NoN-CuRReNt
Long service leave

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

603

196

1,249

207

2,255

434

434

2010
$’000

1,454

196

6,452

–

8,102

520

520

totAl
$’000

8,622

852

(86)

(6,573)

(126)

2,689

2,255

434

2,689

8,102

520

8,622

(A)  movemeNts iN PRovisioNs
Movements in each class of provisions during the financial year are set out below

At 1 July 2010

Arising during the year

Unused amounts reversed

Utilised

Discount Rate Adjustment

At 30 June 2011

Current 2011

Non-current 2011

Current 2010

Non-current 2010

ReDuNDANCy
PRovisioN
$’000

DiReCtoRs
RetiRiNg
PRovisioN
$’000

oNeRous
CoNtRACts
$’000

PRovisioN
foR loAN to
AssoCiAte
$’000

loNg
seRviCe
leAve
$’000

1,454

352

–

(1,203)

–

603

603

–

603

1,454

–

1,454

196

–

–

–

–

196

196

–

196

196

–

196

6,452

293

–

(5,370)

(126)

1,249

1,249

–

1,249

6,452

–

6,452

–

207

–

–

–

207

207

–

207

–

–

–

520

–

(86)

–

–

434

–

434

434

–

520

520

(B)  NAtuRe AND timiNg of the PRovisioNs

ReDuNDANCy PRovisioN

(i) 
The Group has recognised a provision for redundancy in relation to restructuring within the Prime Media Group operations. The majority of this provision 
balance at 30 June 2011 will be settled by November 2011.

(ii)  DiReCtoR’s RetiRiNg PRovisioN
Refer to Remuneration Report. The Directors’ Retiring provision was approved by shareholders in November 1997.

(iii)  oNeRous CoNtRACts PRovisioN
Upon acquisition of Prime Digital Media Pty Limited management identified numerous unavoidable contractual obligations where the value of the 
obligation exceeded the likely economic benefit that will arise from these obligations. As a result management raised a provision for the losses expected 
under these contracts.

As at 30 June 2011 the Group has exited the Prime Digital Media business. The balance of the provision is expected to be settled within the next 12 to 24 months.

(iv)  PRovisioN foR loAN to AssoCiAte
Under the shareholders agreement for Mildura Digital Television Pty Limited the shareholders are required to provide funding to meet the losses of 
the company in proportion to their shareholding. The balance of the provision represents funding owed by the Group to Mildura Digital Television Pty 
Limited as at 30 June 2011.

loNg seRviCe leAve

(v) 
Refer to note 2(Q) for the relevant accounting policy and a discussion of the significant estimations and assumptions applied in the measurement 
of this provision.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

73

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

20 CoNtRiButeD equity

issueD AND PAiD uP CAPitAl

(A) 
Ordinary shares fully paid

366,330,303 shares (2010: 366,330,303 shares)

(B)  movemeNts iN shARes oN issue

ordinary

Beginning of the financial year

Issued during the year

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

  310,262

310,262

2011

2010

NumBeR of
shARes

$’000

number of
shares

$’000

366,330,303

310,262

358,422,021

305,643

– shares issued as consideration for equity settled transaction

End of the financial year

–

–

7,908,282

366,330,303

310,262

366,330,303

4,619

310,262

(C)  shARe oPtioNs 
Options over ordinary shares:

emPloyee shARe oPtioN sCheme
During the financial year, nil (2010: 5,250,000) options were issued over ordinary shares. 

During the financial year, 1,750,000 (2010: Nil) options lapsed, Nil (2010: Nil) were forfeited and 3,500,000 (2010: Nil) options were surrendered 
by executives and subsequently cancelled by the Company.

At the end of the year there were nil (2010: 5,250,000) un-issued ordinary shares in respect of which options were outstanding.

(D)  teRms AND CoNDitioNs of CoNtRiButeD equity

oRDiNARy shARes
Holders of ordinary shares have the right to receive dividends as declared and, in the event of winding up the company, to participate in the proceeds 
from the sale of all surplus assets in proportion to the number of and amounts paid up on shares held.

Ordinary shares entitle their holder to one vote, either in person or by proxy, at a meeting of the Company.

(e)  CAPitAl mANAgemeNt
When managing capital, the board’s objective is to ensure the entity continues as a going concern as well as to maintain optimal returns to shareholders 
and benefits for other stakeholders. The board also aims to maintain a capital structure that ensures the lowest costs of capital available to the entity.

The board and management are constantly reviewing the capital structure to take advantage of favourable costs of capital or high returns on assets. As 
the market is constantly changing, the board may change the amount of dividends to be paid to shareholders, return capital to shareholders, issue new 
shares or sell assets to reduce debt.

During 2011, the Company paid dividends of $12,822,000 (2010: $8,015,000). The board’s target for dividend payments has historically been to pay 
approximately 50% of the normalised earnings per share. The payout rate was increased to 75% of earnings per share as reflected in the 2011 final 
dividend declared.

The board and management monitor capital requirements with regard to its banking covenant requirements as well as comparative guidance to 
companies of similar size and nature of operations. 

The key capital management measures that the company reviews on a ongoing basis are:

Net Debt/(Net Debt + Equity)

Net Debt to Normalised EBITDA(1)

Interest Cover to Normalised EBITDA(1)

tARget

55% – 65%

2.5 – 3.5

> 3.5

At BAlANCe
DAte

47%

2.3

5.3

(1)  Normalise EBITDA is calculated as EBITDA before significant items. This is the same definition of EBITDA that is used for assessment of the above measures for compliance 

with banking covenants.

74

 
NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

21 RetAiNeD eARNiNgs AND ReseRves

General reserve

Foreign currency translation

Employee benefits equity reserve

Accumulated losses

(A)  foReigN CuRReNCy tRANslAtioN
(i)  NAtuRe AND PuRPose of ReseRve
The foreign currency translation reserve is used to record exchange differences arising from the translation  
of the financial statements of foreign controlled operations.
(ii)  movemeNts iN ReseRve
Balance at beginning of year

Transfer of foreign currency translation reserve relating to assets held for resale to the statement  
of comprehensive income

Gain/(loss) on translation of overseas controlled entities 

Balance at end of year

(B)  emPloyee BeNefits equity ReseRve
(i)  NAtuRe AND PuRPose of ReseRve
The employee benefits equity reserve is used to record the value of equity benefits provided to employees  
and directors as part of their remuneration. Refer to note 27 for further details of these plans.
(ii)  movemeNts iN ReseRve
Balance at beginning of year

Share Based Payment 

Balance at end of year

(C)  geNeRAl ReseRve
(i)  NAtuRe AND PuRPose of ReseRve
This reserve account reflects the value of acquired non-controlling interests in controlled entities  
after the initial control transaction has occurred.
(ii)  movemeNts iN ReseRve
Balance at beginning of year

Acquisition of non-controlling interest in controlled entities

Balance at end of year

(ACCumulAteD losses)/RetAiNeD PRofits

(D) 
Balance at the beginning of year

Net profit/(loss) attributable to members of Prime Media Group Limited

Total accumulated losses

Dividends provided for or paid

Balance at end of year

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

(2,787)

–

2,709

(78)

2010
$’000

(2,787)

(794)

2,044

(1,537)

(157,071)

(171,415)

(794)

995

(201)

–

(2,044)

1,032

218

(794)

2,044

665

2,709

2,028

16

2,044

(2,787)

–

(2,787)

(171,415)

27,166

(144,249)

(12,822)

(157,071)

–

(2,787)

(2,787)

(108,941)

(54,459)

(163,400)

(8,015)

(171,415)

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

75

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

22 NoN-CoNtRolliNg iNteRests

ACquisitioN of BRoADCAst PRoDuCtioN seRviCes limiteD AND CoNtRolleD eNtities
On 6 November 2009, Prime Media Broadcasting Services Pty Limited (“Prime”), a controlled entity of Prime Media Group Limited, completed the 
acquisition of the non-controlling interest in Broadcast Production Services Limited (“BPSL”) a listed company based in Australia.

This acquisition was completed in a number of steps. On 21 September 2009, Prime acquired 21.52% of the shares in BPSL, at which time the Company 
proceeded to compulsorily acquire all of the outstanding shares of BPSL. Upon completion of the compulsory acquisition, BPSL was delisted from the 
Australian Securities Exchange.

The consideration for the acquisition is as follows:

Shares issued as consideration less costs

total Purchase Consideration

23 BusiNess ComBiNAtioN

2010
$’000

2,787

2,787

ACquisitioN of PRime DigitAlwoRks Pty limiteD
On 30 June 2010, Prime New Media Investments Pty Limited, a controlled entity of Prime Media Group Limited, acquired 67% of the shares in Prime 
Digitalworks Pty Limited. This acquisition took the groups’ shareholding to 100%.

The final fair value and book value of the identifiable assets purchased are:

Cash

Prepayments

Property, plant & equipment

Trade payables

Provision for employee benefits

Net Assets

Total purchase consideration

total goodwill recognised

Goodwill impairment expense

total goodwill

24 DeRivAtives

Current liabilities

Interest rate swap contracts

CARRyiNg
AmouNt
$’000

ReCogNiseD
fAiR vAlue oN
ACquisitioN
$’000

3

79

148

(1,576)

(55)

(1,401)

3

79

148

(1,576)

(55)

(1,401)

–

1,401

(1,401)

–

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

1,687

3,020

(A) 

iNstRumeNts useD By the gRouP

iNteRest RAte swAP AgReemeNts
At balance date, the Company had interest rate swap agreements with a notional amount of $95 million, (2010: $95 million) on which it pays a fixed rate of 
6.38% or 6.39% and receives a floating rate of the Bank Bill Swap Rate. The interest rate swap instruments are used to protect part of the Borrowings from 
exposure to floating interest rates. The swaps in place cover 63% (2010: 56%) of the borrowings outstanding at balance date. Swap agreements expire in 
July 2012 and October 2012. The interest rate swaps require settlement of net interest receivable or payable each 90 days. The swaps are measured at fair 
value and all gains and losses are taken to the profit and loss.

iNteRest RAte Risk

(B) 
Information regarding interest rate risk exposure is set out in note 3.

(C)  CReDit Risk
Credit risk arises from the potential failure of counterparties to meet their obligations at maturity of contracts. This arises on derivative financial 
instruments with unrealised gains. Management has arranged to share counterparty risks of contracts across numerous blue chip parties.

76

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

25 exPeNDituRe CommitmeNts

(A)  CAPitAl exPeNDituRe CommitmeNts
Estimated capital expenditure contracted for at reporting date, but not provided for, payable:

–  not later than one year

8,242

7,012

Included in the above disclosed capital commitments at 30 June 2011 is approximately $6 million in expenditure relating to the roll out of digital 
transmission in Western Australia. The Company is entitled to claim government grant income to fund 50% of this expenditure. The amounts 
disclosed above are the gross amounts before taking into consideration this government funding.

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

(B)  leAse exPeNDituRe CommitmeNts
operating leases (Continuing operations group as lessee):

Minimum lease payments

–  not later than one year

– 

– 

later than one year and not later than five years

later than five years

Aggregate lease expenditure contracted for at reporting date

8,524

21,157

13,724

43,405

8,748

23,729

15,524

48,001

Operating leases have an average lease term of 3 years for Motor Vehicles, 3 year (+ 3 year options) for building leases, and 5-15 years for 
transmission site access agreements. Motor Vehicle leases are fixed monthly rentals for the term of the lease. Building leases are generally fixed for 
the initial lease term, then subject to CPI adjustments if options are taken up. The majority of the transmission sites leases are rentals that are subject 
to annual CPI adjustment. There are no restrictions placed upon the lessee by entering into these leases.

(C)  leAse exPeNDituRe CommitmeNts
Certain assets owned or under operating leases with excess capacity have been sub-let to third parties. These non-cancellable leases have 
remaining terms of between 1 to 15 years. All leases include clauses to enable upward revision of the rental charges on an annual basis according 
to increases in the Consumer Price Index.

operating leases (non-cancellable group as lessor):

Minimum lease payments receivable

–  not later than one year

– 

– 

later than one year and not later than five years

later than five years

Aggregate lease income contracted for at reporting date

1,340

2,773

767

4,880

912

2,818

1,098

4,828

(D) 

 otheR CommitmeNts CoveRiNg the ReNtAl of teChNiCAl  
equiPmeNt uNDeR A loNg teRm AgReemeNt

The technical communications equipment that is fundamental to the distribution of the Group TV programming and data communications are 
leased through long term operating leases between 7 and 15 years.

–  not later than one year

– 

– 

later than one year and not later than five years

later than five years

6,048

24,194

1,529

31,771

6,039

24,155

1,510

31,704

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

77

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

25 exPeNDituRe CommitmeNts (CONTINUED)

(e)  fiNANCe leAse CommitmeNts:
–  not later than one year

– 

– 

later than one year and not later than five years

later than five years

Total Minimum lease payments

– 

future finance charges

Lease Liability

–  current liability

–  non-current liability

(f)  fiNANCe leAse CommitmeNts At PReseNt vAlue:
–  not later than one year

– 

– 

later than one year and not later than five years

later than five years

Present Value of Minimum lease payments

The finance lease commitments in 2010 include amounts relating to assets held for resale and, as such 
these liabilities are disclosed as liabilities directly associated with assets classified as held for resale. 
The abovementioned finance lease commitments are disclosed in the financial statement as follows:

Current liabilities directly associated with assets classified as held for sale

Current interest-bearing loans and borrowings (note 18)

Non-current interest-bearing loans and borrowings (note 18)

Total included in statement of financial position

(g)  RemuNeRAtioN CommitmeNts:
Commitments for the payment of salaries and other remuneration under long-term employment contracts in existence 
at the reporting date but not recognised as liabilities, payable

–  not later than one year

– 

– 

later than one year and not later than five years

later than five years

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

897

2,785

420

4,102

(676)

3,426

627

2,799

3,426

857

2,302

267

3,426

857

2,302

267

3,426

–

–

–

–

23,384

2,961

735

27,080

(6,386)

20,694

17,637

3,057

20,694

17,889

2,358

447

20,694

17,889

2,358

447

20,694

380

570

–

950

Amounts disclosed as remuneration commitments include commitments arising from the fixed term service contracts of directors and executives referred 
to in the remuneration report of the directors’ report that are not recognised as liabilities and are not included in the compensation of KMP. Due to the 
departure of Rob Gamble on 5 November 2010, the Group has no fixed term commitments for the payment of salaries and other remuneration under 
long-term employment contracts, which have not been recognised as liabilities or payables at reporting date.

78

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

26 CoNtiNgeNt liABilities AND CoNtiNgeNt Assets

The details and estimated maximum amounts of contingent liabilities are set out below. The directors are not aware of any circumstance or information which 
would lead them to believe that these liabilities will crystallise and consequently no provisions are provided in the accounts in respect of these matters.

litigAtioN
In 2005 a group member, Wastar International Pty limited (“WI”), entered into an agreement with Marigold Production (Canada) Inc (“MPCI”) under which 
WI was granted the North American distribution rights to a film under an arrangement which provided for a minimum guaranteed distribution fee of US 
$2 million payable by WI to MPCI, subject to certain contractual conditions being met. WI did not believe those contractual conditions were met and 
therefore did not make payment on receipt of a demand for payment. The directors do not believe the liability exists. There has been no further action 
concerning this unresolved matter over the last 4 years. 

Liabilities not recognised in the balance sheet are:

guARANtees
The Group has issued the following guarantee at 30 June 2011:

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

1,862

1,862

2010
$’000

2,347

2,347

It has guaranteed to an unrelated third party the payment of a contractual commitment of WA SatCo Pty Limited, an associate company in which the 
Group holds 50% of the share capital. WA SatCo Pty Limited has entered into a non cancellable contract for the purchase of satellite services in WA 
for a period of 9 years until 30 June 2020 at the rate of $2,346,192 per annum. In the event that WA SatCo Pty Limited defaults on any payments under 
this contract, the Group may be liable for full payment under the guarantee it has provided. WA Sat Co Pty Limited has simultaneously entered into an 
agreement with the Commonwealth Government which provides for 100% funding of this satellite service for a period of 9 years until 30 June 2020. This 
agreement can be terminated without notice by the Commonwealth Government. 

Maximum potential contingent commitment arising from the above mentioned guarantee:

–  Not later than one year

–  Later than one year and not later than five years

–  Later than five years

Maximum Contingent Commitments

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

2,346

9,384

9,384

21,114

–

–

–

–

As noted above this entire amount in maximum potential contingent commitment is offset in entirety by government funding.

27 emPloyee BeNefits AND suPeRANNuAtioN CommitmeNts

emPloyee BeNefits
The aggregate employee benefit liability is comprised of: 

Accrued annual leave and long service leave (current)

Accrued long service leave (non-current)

Notes

17

19

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

5,077

434

5,511

5,736

520

6,256

suPeRANNuAtioN BeNefits
A superannuation plan has been established by the economic entity for the provision of benefits to Australian employees of the economic entity on 
retirement, death or disability. Benefits provided under this plan are based on contributions for each employee and at retirement are equivalent to 
accumulated contributions and earnings. All death and disability benefits are insured with various life assurance companies. Employees contribute various 
percentages of their gross income and the company also contributes at varying rates. The company’s contributions under the Superannuation Guarantee 
Levy are legally enforceable.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

79

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

28 shARe BAseD PAymeNt PlAN

(A)  ReCogNiseD shARe BAseD PAymeNt exPeNses
The expense recognised for employee services received during the year is shown below:

Expense arising from equity-settled share-based payment transactions

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

665

2010
$’000

16

The share-based payment plan is described below. During the financial year, 1,750,000 (2010: Nil) options lapsed, Nil (2010: Nil) were forfeited and 
3,500,000 (2010: Nil) options were cancelled.

(B)  tyPes of shARe-BAseD PAymeNt PlANs

emPloyee shARe oPtioN sCheme (esos)
The group has in place an Employee Share Option Scheme. At two Annual General Meetings (1992 and 1995), shareholders have given approval of the 
terms of the Prime Media Group Employee Share Option Scheme presented at these meetings. Participation in the Scheme is available to any director of 
the parent entity and any person who is in the employment of the Group. Recommendations in respect of allocations of share options under the Scheme 
are made by the Remuneration Committee, for approval by the board. The total number of Options on issue by the parent entity shall not at any time 
exceed five per cent (5%) of the parent entity’s total number of ordinary shares on issue of which the total number of Options on issue by the parent entity 
to directors of the parent entity shall not exceed 2.5% of the total number of ordinary shares on issue. 

As at 30 June 2011, all 3,500,000 options outstanding under the ESOS were cancelled. The Remuneration Committee reviewed the long-term incentive 
plan and, on recommendation from an external remuneration consultant, introduced a new Performance Rights Plan in the 2012 financial year. Details are 
outlined in the Remuneration Report.

(C)  summARies of oPtioNs gRANteD uNDeR esos
The following table outlines the number (no.) and weighted average exercise price (WAEP) of, and movements in, share options on issue during the year.

2011

2010

No.

wAeP

no.

WaeP

Balance at beginning of year

5,250,000

$0.90

–  granted

–  exercised

– 

lapsed

–  cancelled(1)

– 

forfeited

Balance at end of year

Exercisable at end of year

–

–

(1,750,000)

(3,500,000)

–

–

–

–

–

$0.90

$0.90

–

–

–

–

5,250,000

–

–

–

–

5,250,000

–

–

$0.90

–

–

–

–

$0.90

–

The outstanding balance as at 30 June 2011 is nil.

(1)  On 30 June 2011, 3,500,000 options issued to that had not vested or lapsed at balance date were surrendered by executives and subsequently cancelled by the Company

(D)  oPtioN PRiCiNg moDel
The fair value of the equity settled share options granted under the ESOS is estimated as at the date of grant using a binomial model taking into account 
the terms and conditions upon which the options were granted.

There were no options granted during the current year. The fair value of options granted in the prior year were estimated on the date of grant using the 
following inputs to the model:

Dividend yield (%)

Expected volatility (%)

Historical volatility (%)

Risk-free interest rate (%)

Expected life of options (years)

Option exercise price ($)

Weighted average share price at measurement date ($)

2011

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

2010

4.7%

50%

50%

4.79%

5

$0.90

$0.75

The dividend yield reflects the assumption that the current dividend payout will continue with no anticipated increases. The expected life of the options 
is based on historical data and is not necessarily indicative of exercise patterns that may occur. The expected volatility reflects the assumption that the 
historical volatility is indicative of future trends, which may also not necessarily be the actual outcome. 

80

 
 
NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

(e)  weighteD AveRAge RemAiNiNg CoNtRACtuAl life.
The weighted average contractual life of share options outstanding as at 30 June 2011 is nil years (2010: 4.95 years).

(f)  RANge of exeRCise PRiCe
The range of exercise price for options outstanding at the end of the year was nil (2010: $0.90).

(g)  weighteD AveRAge foR vAlue
The weighted average fair value of options granted during the year was nil (2010: $0.13).

29 eveNts AfteR the BAlANCe sheet DAte 

On 26 August 2011 the Company secured a commitment from its bankers to provide a $200 million bank loan facility with a term of 4 years, repayable in 
full on expiry. Interest will be charged at a rate of BBSY plus a margin of between 1.70% and 2.60%. Formal documentation is expected to be executed on 
30 September 2011.

30 AuDitoR’s RemuNeRAtioN

Amounts received or due and receivable by

Ernst & Young Australia for:

–  an audit or review of the financial report of the entity and any other entity in the consolidated entity

–  other services in relation to the entity and any other entity in the consolidated entity

Amounts received or due and receivable by related practices of Ernst & Young (Australia) for:

–  Taxation services provided by Ernst & Young New Zealand

–  other services provided by Ernst & Young New Zealand 

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$

2010
$

257,500

102,510

360,010

1,683

10,125

11,808

531,359

380,029

911,388

33,670

112,343

146,013

371,818

1,057,401

31 RelAteD PARty DisClosuRes 

(A)  suBsiDiARies
The consolidated financial statements include the financial statements of Prime Media Group Limited and the subsidiaries listed in the following table.

NAme

CouNtRy of iNCoRPoRAtioN

equity iNteRest

2011
%

2010
%

Prime Television (Holdings) Pty Limited

Zamojill Pty Limited

Prime Television (Southern) Pty Limited

Prime Television (Northern) Pty Limited

Prime Television (Victoria) Pty Limited

Prime Properties (Albury) Pty Limited

Prime Television New Zealand Limited

Prime Ventures New Zealand Limited

Prime Television Digital Media Pty Limited

Prime Television (Investments) Pty Limited

Golden West Network Pty Limited

Mining Television Network Pty Limited

Telepro Pty Limited

Golden West Satellite Communications Pty Limited

135 Nominees Pty Limited

Mid-Western Television Pty Limited

Geraldton Telecasters Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Cairns) Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Townsville) Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Barrier Reef) Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Rockhampton) Pty Limited

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

New Zealand

New Zealand

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

81

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

31 RelAteD PARty DisClosuRes (CONTINUED)

(A)  suBsiDiARies (CONTINUED)

NAme

CouNtRy of iNCoRPoRAtioN

equity iNteRest

2011
%

2010
%

Prime Radio (Gladstone) Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Mackay) Pty Limited

Prime Radio Holdings Pty Limited

Prime Radio (Cairns-AM) Pty Ltd

Prime Radio (Mackay-AM) Pty Ltd

Prime Media Communications Pty Limited

Prime New Media Investments Pty Limited

Prime Media Developments Pty Limited

Seven Affiliate Sales Pty Limited

Prime Media Broadcasting Services Pty Limited

Prime Media Singapore Pte Ltd

Prime Media Group Services Pty Limited

AMI Radio Pty Limited

Hot 91 Pty Limited

Prime Digital Media Pty Limited

Fireback Digital Pty Limited

POP Digital Media Pty Limited

Prime National Radio Sales Pty Limited

Broadcast Production Services Pty Limited

Production Strategies Pty Limited

Production Strategies Discretionary Trust

P.R.O. Television Unit Trust

Producer Representatives Organization Inc.

Producer Representatives Organization International Inc. 

Wastar International Pty Ltd

Screenworld Pty Ltd

Family Bloom Productions Inc

OSB Holdings Pty Ltd

OSB Unit Trust

On Site Broadcasting Pty Limited

OSB Australia Pty Ltd

Prime Resources One Limited

Prime Resources Two Limited

OSB Corporation Pty Limited

Becker Entertainment (Singapore) Pte Ltd

On Corporation Pty Limited

Moonlight Premium Cinema Pty Limited

MMJT Productions Pty Limited

Moonlight Cinema Management Pty Limited

Moonlight Projects Pty Limited

Broadcast Rentals Pty Limited

Zero1Zero HD Pty Limited(1)

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Singapore

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

USA

USA

Australia

Australia

USA

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

New Zealand

New Zealand

Australia

Singapore

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

–

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

(1)  The disposal of Zero1Zero HD Pty Limited was completed on 28 October 2010 as part of the sale of the Australian On Site Broadcasting business to Gearhouse Broadcast Pty 

Ltd – see Note 6

(B)  ultimAte PAReNt
Prime Media Group Limited is the ultimate Australian entity and the ultimate parent entity of the Group.

(C)  key mANAgemeNt PeRsoNNel (kmP)
Details relating to KMP, including remuneration paid, are included in the Remuneration Report and note 32.

(D)  tRANsACtioNs with RelAteD PARties

wholly owNeD gRouP tRANsACtioNs
Sales and purchases are made within the wholly owned group in arm’s length transactions both at normal market prices and on normal commercial terms. 
Outstanding balances at year end are unsecured, interest free and settled through intercompany accounts.

82

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

RegioNAl BRoADCAstiNg AustRAliA limiteD
This company is owned by regional television operators to represent the interest of its shareholders to government, industry groups and major 
advertisers. The company operates on a not-for-profit basis and Prime Media Group contributes funding to the company on a cost recovery basis in line 
with its relative shareholding.

RBA holDiNgs Pty limiteD
This company is owned by regional television operators. This company operates as a provider of transmission facilities under the Digital Black Spots 
Infill Program. The Company has entered into agreements under normal commercial terms and conditions with this company to use these transmission 
facilities for periods up to 10 years.

RegioNAl tAm Pty limiteD
This company is owned by regional television operators to facilitate and manage the audience metering services for the regional television markets. 
The Company is party to a commercial agreement in which it purchases ratings services from Regional TAM Pty Limited. This agreement is under normal 
commercial terms and conditions.

wA sAtCo Pty limiteD
WA SatCo Pty Limited is owned by the Company and WIN Television Pty Limited and has been engaged by the Commonwealth Government to provide 
the WA Vast Service for a period of 10 years. The shareholders of the company provide services to WA SatCo to enable its operations. These services are 
recovered from WA SatCo on a cost recovery basis.

BRoADCAst tRANsmissioN seRviCes Pty limiteD (Bts)
The Company has a 33% shareholding in BTS. BTS provides transmission maintenance, site installation and management services to regional 
broadcasters and other third party customers. The Company entered into a contract with BTS for the provision of site maintenance services over a 10 year 
period at an annual cost of $1,200,000 per annum under normal commercial terms and conditions.

ChANNel seveN queeNslAND Pty limiteD
The Company provides sales representation services to Seven Queensland Pty Limited, an entity associated with one of the Company’s major 
shareholders. The fees payable by Seven Queensland Pty Limited are based on normal commercial terms and conditions applicable to this type of 
service.

32 key mANAgemeNt PeRsoNNel

(A)  DetAils of key mANAgemeNt PeRsoNNel  

DiReCtoRs 

(i) 
P.J.Ramsay AO 
M.S.Siddle 
L.K.Murdoch 
P.J.Evans 
A.Hamill 
I.P.Grier AM 
I.R.Neal 
S.L.McKenna 
I.C.Audsley 

(ii) 
D.Edwards 
R.Gamble 
R.Reeve 
G.Smith 
P.Stubbings 
L.Kennedy 
S.Wood 

exeCutives 

Chairman (non-executive)
Deputy Chairman (non-executive)
Director (non-executive) – appointed 7 October 2010, resigned 9 November 2010
Director (non-executive)
Director (non-executive)
Director (non-executive) 
Director (non-executive)
Director (non-executive)
Director (Chief Executive Officer)

Chief Executive Officer – Television
Chief Executive Officer – Radio and Digital Media (resigned 5 November 2010)
Group General Counsel and Company Secretary (resigned 30 September 2010)
Chief Technology Officer
Chief Financial Officer (resigned 8 December 2010)
Chief Financial Officer (appointed 6 December 2010)
Director – Integration and Digital Media

(B)  ComPeNsAtioN of key mANAgemeNt PeRsoNNel

Short term employee benefits

Post-employment benefits

Long Term Benefits

Termination benefits

Share based payments

CoNsoliDAteD

2011
$’000

3,517

113

351

713

369

5,063

2010
$’000

3,030

110

725

1,060

16

4,941

Details of remuneration amounts paid to individual KMP are disclosed in tables 1 and 2 of section 7 of the Remuneration Report. 

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

83

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

32 key mANAgemeNt PeRsoNNel (CONTINUED)

(C)  oPtioN holDiNgs of key mANAgemeNt PeRsoNNel

2011

Directors

I.Audsley

2010

Directors

I.Audsley

BAlANCe At
BegiNNiNg
of PeRioD
 1 July 2010

5,250,000

5,250,000

BAlANCe At
BegiNNiNg
of PeRioD
1 July 2009

gRANteD As
RemuNeRAtioN

oPtioNs
exeRCiseD

Net ChANge
otheR

BAlANCe 
At eND of 
PeRioD
30 JuNe 2011

totAl

Not 
exeRCisABle

exeRCisABle

vesteD At 30 JuNe 2011

–

–

–

–

(5,250,000)

(5,250,000)

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

gRANteD As
RemuNeRAtioN

oPtioNs
exeRCiseD

Net ChANge
otheR

BAlANCe 
At eND of 
PeRioD
30 JuNe 2010

totAl

Not 
exeRCisABle

exeRCisABle

vesteD At 30 JuNe 2010

–

–

5,250,000

5,250,000

–

–

–

–

5,250,000

5,250,000

–

–

–

–

–

(D)  shAReholDiNgs of key mANAgemeNt PeRsoNNel
Shares held in Prime Media Group Limited (number)

oPeNiNg 
BAlANCe
oRD.

gRANteD As
RemuNeRAtioN
oRD.

oN exeRCise of 
oPtioNs oRD.

Net ChANge 
otheR oRD.

ClosiNg BAlANCe
oRD.

30 June 2011

Directors

P.J.Ramsay AO

M.S.Siddle

P.J.Evans

executives

D.Edwards

R.Gamble(2)

P.Stubbings(3)

total

30 June 2010

Directors

P.J.Ramsay AO

M.S.Siddle

P.J.Evans

W.Syphers(1)

executives

D.Edwards

R.Gamble

P.Stubbings

total

107,993,654

984,082

24,286

48,572

199,588

43,073

109,293,255

107,993,654

984,082

24,286

201,000

48,572

98,551

43,073

109,393,218

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

101,037

–

101,037

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

1,910,000

109,903,654

–

–

8,000

(199,588)

(43,073)

984,082

24,286

56,572

–

–

1,675,339

110,968,594

–

–

–

(201,000)

–

–

–

107,993,654

984,082

24,286

–

48,572

199,588

43,073

(201,000)

109,293,255

(1)  Mr Syphers resigned from the Group on 31 March 2010. The net change noted in the above table is solely to reflect Mr Syphers departure as KMP.
(2)  Mr Gamble resigned from the Group on 5 November 2010. The net change noted in the above table is solely to reflect Mr Gamble’s departure as KMP.
(3)  Mr Stubbings resigned from the Group on 8 December 2010. The net change noted in the above table is solely to reflect Mr Stubbings’ departure as KMP.

84

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

All equity transactions with specified directors and specified executives other than those arising from the exercise of remuneration options have been 
entered into under terms and conditions no more favourable than those the entity would have adopted if dealing at arm’s length.

(e)  loANs to key mANAgemeNt PeRsoNNel

(i) 

DetAils of AggRegAtes of loANs to sPeCifieD DiReCtoRs AND sPeCifieD exeCutives ARe As follows:

BAlANCe
At BegiNNiNg
of PeRioD
$’000

iNteRest
ChARgeD
$’000

loAN
BAlANCe
wAiveD
$’000

loAN
RePAymeNts
$’000

BAlANCe 
At eND of
PeRioD
$’000

iNteRest
Not
ChARgeD
$’000

NumBeR iN
gRouP
At BAlANCe
DAte

2011

2010

420

1,106

–

–

140

686

–

–

280

420

28

45

2

2

 DetAils of key mANAgemeNt PeRsoNNel with loANs iN the RePoRtiNg PeRioD ARe As follows:

(ii) 
30 June 2011

executives

D.Edwards

G.Smith

total

30 June 2010

Directors

W.Syphers

executives

D.Edwards

G.Smith

Total

300

120

420

546

400

160

1,106

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

100

40

140

546

100

40

686

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

200

80

280

–

300

120

420

highest loAN 
BAlANCe 
DuRiNg yeAR

20

8

28

18

19

8

45

300

120

420

–

400

160

560

(iii)  teRms AND CoNDitioNs of loANs
The loans to executives are interest free and will be forgiven on the basis of continued services with the company. 20% of the original loan balance will be 
forgiven on 1 July of each year if the executive remains employed with the company at that date. If the executive terminates his employment during the 
5 year period the balance of the loan at the date of termination is repayable by the executive on the date of termination. The executives have the option 
of making repayments during the course of the loan or having further amounts waived from these loan balances by taking reductions in salary or forgoing 
the payment of entitlements such as bonuses. Any loan amounts waived by the company are subject to fringe benefits tax at the cost of the company.

(f)  otheR tRANsACtioNs AND BAlANCes with key mANAgemeNt PeRsoNNel AND RelAteD PARties
There were no other transactions and balances with key management personnel other than those disclosed in this note during the year ended 30 June 2011.

33 PAReNt eNtity iNfoRmAtioN

iNfoRmAtioN RelAtiNg to PRime meDiA gRouP limiteD
Current assets 

Total assets

Current liabilities

Total liabilities

Issued capital

Retained earnings

Employee benefits equity reserve

Total shareholders’ equity

Profit or loss of the parent entity

Total comprehensive income of the parent entity

PRime meDiA gRouP limiteD

2011
$’000

2010
$’000

106

910,339

5,763

580,938

310,262

15,805

3,334

329,401

(8,104)

(8,104)

462

894,207

3,630

544,545

310,262

36,746

2,653

349,661

26,961

26,961

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

85

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

33 PAReNt eNtity iNfoRmAtioN (CONTINUED)

guARANtees eNteReD iNto By PRime meDiA gRouP limiteD iN RelAtioN to the DeBts of its suBsiDiARies
As a condition of the Class Order, Prime Media Group Limited and its 100% owned Australian resident subsidiaries (the “Closed” Group) entered into 
a Deed of Cross Guarantee on 17 October 2006. The effect of the deed is that Prime Media Group Limited has guaranteed to pay any deficiency in the 
event of winding up any of the controlled entities within the Closed Group. The controlled entities within the Closed Group have also given a similar 
guarantee in the event that Prime Media Group Limited is wound up. (Refer Note 13)

CoNtiNgeNt liABilities of PRime meDiA gRouP limiteD
By virtue of being a member of the Deed of Cross Guarantee mentioned above, the Company has guaranteed to pay any deficiency in the event of 
winding up Golden West Networks Pty Limited (GWN), a wholly owned subsidiary and party to the Deed of Cross Guarantee. GWN has guaranteed to 
an unrelated third party the payment of a contractual commitment of WA SatCo Pty Limited, an associate company in which GWN holds 50% of the share 
capital. WA SatCo Pty Limited has entered into a non cancellable contract for the purchase of satellite services in WA for a period of 9 years until 30 June 
2020 at the rate of $2,346,192 per annum. In the event that WA SatCo Pty Limited defaults on any payments under this contract, GWN may be liable 
for full payment under the guarantee it has provided. WA Sat Co Pty Limited has simultaneously entered into an agreement with the Commonwealth 
Government which provides for 100% funding of this satellite service for a period of 9 years until 30 June 2020. This agreement can be terminated without 
notice by the Commonwealth Government. 

CoNtRACtuAl CommitmeNts foR the ACquisitioN By PRime meDiA gRouP limiteD of PRoPeRty,  
PlANt AND equiPmeNt
The Company has no contractual commitments for the acquisition of property, plant and equipment (2010: nil)

34 oPeRAtiNg segmeNts

iDeNtifiCAtioN of RePoRtABle segmeNts
The Group has identified its operating segments based on internal reports that are reviewed and used by the Board (the chief operating decision makers) 
in assessing performance and in determining the allocation of resources.

The operating segments are identified by management based on the manner in which the product is delivered, and the nature of services provided. 
Discrete financial information about each of these operating businesses is reported to the Board on at least a monthly basis.

DesCRiPtioN of segmeNts

CoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs

Television Broadcasting
Television Broadcasting comprises “free to air” television broadcasting through Prime and the Golden West Network (GWN). 

The PRIME7 television broadcast signal services the regional locations of Northern and Southern New South Wales, Canberra, Victoria, and the Gold 
Coast area while regional Western Australia is serviced by the GWN7 television broadcast signal. The majority of revenue is sourced from television 
advertising in Australia. 

Radio Broadcasting
Radio Broadcasting consists of 10 radio stations which operate within coastal Queensland stretching from the Sunshine Coast to Cairns. The major source 
of revenue is radio advertising.

Online
Local websites, integrating with the PRIME7 and GWN7 broadcast footprint, to deliver localised content across the categories of news, weather, sport, TV 
shows, local jobs and community events.

Corporate and Other
Includes administrative and financial support operations of the Group as a whole. These services are provided across the Group, mainly in its capacity as a 
public company, and are therefore not attributable to any of the operating units. These activities are reported separately to the Board.

DisCoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs

Broadcast Production services
Broadcast Production Services comprised outside broadcast facilities and services in Australia and New Zealand, as well as Moonlight outdoor cinemas.

Each of these businesses was sold during the year ended 30 June 2011.

Prime Digital Media
Prime Digital Media produce and deliver digital content via out-of-home digital display in major retail outlets. The majority of revenue is sourced via sale 
of visual advertising content and production of content. A decision to formally exit this business, effective 30 June 2011, was made

ACCouNtiNg PoliCies AND iNteR-segmeNt tRANsACtioNs
The accounting policies used by the Group in reporting segments internally are the same as those contained in Note 2 to the accounts.

86

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

yeAR eNDeD 30 JuNe 2011

segment Revenues

External sales and customers

Other income (excluding interest income)

total segment revenue

Finance income

CoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs

televisioN
BRoAD-
CAstiNg
$’000

RADio
BRoAD-
CAstiNg
$’000

oNliNe
$’000

uN-
AlloCAteD
$’000

totAl
CoN-
tiNuiNg
$’000

DisCoN-
tiNuiNg
oPeRAtioNs

totAl
DisCoN-
tiNuiNg(1)
$’000

totAl
oPeRAtioNs
$’000

231,374

2,419

20,293

848

233,793

21,141

–

23

1,661

36

1,697

–

(144)

253,184

91

3,394

6,878

137

260,062

3,531

(53)

256,578

7,015

263,593

397

344

420

83

503

256,998

7,098

264,096

total revenue per the statement of comprehensive income 233,793

21,164

1,697

Result

EBITDA

EBIT

Segment result (pre-significant items)

Fair value change in derivatives

Fair value change in receivable – deferred contingent consideration

Transfer of foreign currency translation reserve to profit and loss

Redundancies

Loss on disposal of assets held for sale

Net Profit/(loss) before income tax per the statement 
of comprehensive income

Income tax (expense)/benefit

Net Profit/(loss) after tax

Non-controlling interests

Net Profit after tax attributable to members  
of Prime media group limited

63,206

54,591

54,278

4,803

3,638

3,645

(881)

(1,074)

(1,074)

(7,892)

(8,094)

(18,915)

59,236

49,061

37,934

1,333

1,181

(995)

(198)

–

39,255

(11,067)

28,188

(408)

(422)

(376)

–

–

–

–

(583)

(959)

(63)

58,828

48,639

37,558

1,333

1,181

(995)

(198)

(583)

38,296

(11,130)

(1,022)

27,166

–

27,166

(1)   Discontinuing operations include Broadcast Production Services, On-Site Broadcasting, Moonlight Cinema, Prime Media Singapore and Prime Digital Media.

As At 30 JuNe 2011

Assets and liabilities

Segment assets(2)

Investments in associates

total assets

Segment liabilities(2)

Net assets

other segment information

Capital expenditure(3)

Depreciation and amortisation

Share of associate losses

CoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs

televisioN
BRoAD-
CAstiNg
$’000

RADio
BRoAD-
CAstiNg
$’000

oNliNe
$’000

uN-
AlloCAteD
$’000

totAl
CoN-
tiNuiNg
$’000

DisCoN-
tiNuiNg
oPeRAtioNs

totAl
DisCoN-
tiNuiNg(1)
$’000

totAl 
oPeRAtioNs
$’000

306,261

46,996

–

–

306,261

46,996

425

–

425

17,917

371,599

–

–

17,917

371,599

(218,486)

153,113

8,825

170

278

1,099

10,372

(8,616)

(586)

(1,164)

–

(161)

–

(216)

(10,157)

–

(586)

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

371,599

–

371,599

(218,486)

153,113

10,372

(10,157)

(586)

(1)  Discontinuing operations include Broadcast Production Services, On-Site Broadcasting, Moonlight Cinema, Prime Media Singapore and Prime Digital Media.
(2)  Excludes inter-segment receivables and payables, and investments in subsidiaries.

(3)  To comply with the requirements of AASB 114.57, the Group has included the cost of segment assets acquired by way of business combinations.

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

87

NOTEs TO THE FINANCIAL sTATEMENTs
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

34 oPeRAtiNg segmeNts (CONTINUED)

total revenue per the statement of comprehensive income

215,949

20,542

yeAR eNDeD 30 JuNe 2010

segment Revenues

External sales and customers

Other income (excluding interest income)

total segment revenue

Finance income

Result

EBITDA

EBIT

Segment result (pre-significant items)

Fair value change in derivatives

Gain on disposal of investment in available-for-sale financial assets

Impairment expense – intangible assets, radio broadcast licences

Impairment expense – goodwill

Impairment expense – loan to associate

Impairment expense – television program rights

Impairment expense – television production rights

Impairment expense – property, plant and equipment

Restructuring

CEO termination costs

Once off increase to employee entitlements resulting from award change

Make Good provision

destra administration costs

Transfer of foreign currency translation reserve relating to assets held for 
resale to statement of comprehensive income

Redundancies

Net Profit/(loss) before income tax per the statement of comprehensive income

Income tax (expense)/benefit

Net Profit/(loss) after tax

Non-controlling interests

Net Profit after tax attributable to members of Prime media group limited

CoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs

televisioN
BRoAD-
CAstiNg
$’000

RADio
BRoAD-
CAstiNg
$’000

uN-
AlloCAteD
$’000

totAl
CoNt-
iNuiNg
$’000

DisCoN-
tiNuiNg
oPeRAtioNs

totAl
DisCoN-
tiNuiNg(1)
$’000

totAl 
oPeRAtioNs
$’000

212,181

3,768

19,184

1,347

215,949

20,531

–

11

–

231,365

38,187

269,552

(296)

(296)

319

23

4,819

850

5,669

236,184

39,037

275,221

330

25

355

236,514

39,062

275,576

55,449

47,283

46,977

3,294

2,073

2,073

(8,301)

(9,138)

(19,744)

50,442

40,218

29,306

1,518

921

(12,529)

5,408

(2,699)

(5,139)

–

–

–

–

(39,932)

55,850

37,519

24,167

1,518

921

(12,529)

(39,932)

(4,384)

(1,302)

(440)

(7,863)

(4,281)

(1,871)

(626)

(150)

(226)

(1,032)

(2,046)

–

–

(440)

(7,863)

(2,074)

–

–

(150)

–

(1,032)

(1,328)

(4,384)

(1,302)

–

–

(2,207)

(1,871)

(626)

–

(226)

–

(718)

7,882

(10,218)

(2,336)

(57,958)

(50,076)

5,750

(4,468)

(52,208)

(54,544)

85

(54,459)

(1)  Discontinuing operations include Broadcast Production Services, On-Site Broadcasting, Moonlight Cinema, Prime Media Singapore and Prime Digital Media.

As At 30 JuNe 2010

Assets and liabilities

Segment assets(2)

Investments in associates

total assets

Segment liabilities(2)

Net assets

other segment information

Capital expenditure(3)

Depreciation and amortisation

Share of associate losses

CoNtiNuiNg oPeRAtioNs

televisioN
BRoAD-
CAstiNg
$’000

RADio
BRoAD-
CAstiNg
$’000

uN-
AlloCAteD
$’000

totAl
CoN-
tiNuiNg
$’000

DisCoN-
tiNuiNg
oPeRAtioNs

totAl
DisCoN-
tiNuiNg(1)
$’000

totAl 
oPeRAtioNs
$’000

279,882

46,705

29,941

356,528

42,589

399,117

80

–

–

80

–

80

279,962

46,705

29,941

356,608

42,589

399,197

(237,725)

118,883

(24,162)

(261,887)

18,427

137,310

8,221

741

68

9,030

17,229

26,259

(8,166)

(425)

(1,220)

–

(838)

(1,176)

(10,224)

(1,601)

(8,106)

–

(18,330)

(1,601)

(1)  Discontinuing operations include Broadcast Production Services, On-Site Broadcasting, Moonlight Cinema, Prime Media Singapore and Prime Digital Media
(2)  Excludes inter-segment receivables and payables, and investments in subsidiaries.
(3)  To comply with the requirements of AASB 114.57, the Group has included the cost of segment assets acquired by way of business combinations.

88

DIRECTORs’ DECLARATION
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

In accordance with a resolution of the directors of Prime Media Group Limited, I state that:

(1)  In the opinion of the directors:

(a)   the financial statements and notes of Prime Media Group Limited for the financial year ended 30 June 2011 are in accordance with the 

Corporations Act 2001, including:

(i)  giving a true and fair view of its financial position as at 30 June 2011 and performance; and 

(ii)  complying with Accounting Standards (including the Australian Accounting Interpretations) and Corporations Regulations 2001; and

(b)  the financial statements and notes also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards as disclosed in Note 2b

(c)  there are reasonable grounds to believe that the Company will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable.

(2)   This declaration has been made after receiving the declarations required to be made to the directors in accordance with s295A of the Corporations 

Act 2001 for the financial year ending 30 June 2011.

On behalf of the Board

P. J. Evans 
Director

Sydney, 28 September 2011

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

89

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
INDEPENDENT AUDIT REPORT
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

90

INDEPENDENT AUDIT REPORT
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

Prime media GrouP AnnuAl RepoRt 2011

91

AsX ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2011

Additional information required by the Australian Securities Exchange Ltd and not shown elsewhere in this report is as follows. The information is current 
as at 19 September 2011.

(A)   DistRiButioN of equity seCuRities

oRDiNARy shARes
As at 19 September 2011, total number of fully paid up shares on issue is 366,330,303.

The number of shareholders, by size of holding, in each class of share are:

1 – 1,000
1,001 – 5,000
5,001 – 10,000
10,001 – 100,000
100,001 and over

The number of shareholders holding less than a marketable parcel of shares are:

(B)  tweNty lARgest RegisteReD shAReholDeRs
The names of the twenty largest registered holders of quoted shares at 19 September 2011 are:

1 Paul Ramsay Holdings Pty Limited
2 RBC Dexia Investor Services Australia Nominees Limited
3 Network Investment Holdings Pty Limited
4 Bell Potter Nominees Limited
8 National Nominees Limited
JP Morgan Nominees Australia Pty Limited
6
7 HSBC Custody Nominees (Australia) Pty Limited
8 Citicorp Nominees Pty Limited
9 Birketu Pty Limited

10 Cogent Nominees Pty Limited
11 George Walter Mooratoff
12 UBS Nominees Pty Limited
13 Reading Entertainment Australia Pty Limited
14 Effie Holdings Pty Limited
15
Sandhurst Trustees Ltd
16 Paul Ramsay Foundation Pty Limited
17 RW & SJ Holdings Pty Limited 
18 Mr Michael Siddle + Mrs Lee Siddle 
19 WIN Corporation Pty Limited
20 Equitas Nominees Pty Limited

NumBeR
of holDeRs

491
485
182
251
54
1,463
384

listeD oRDiNARy shARes

NumBeR
of shARes

PeRCeNtAge
of oRDiNARy
shARes

108,318,159
60,912,029
41,701,955
32,480,782
26,713,839
18,202,254
13,693,101
8,223,473
8,000,000
6,683,043
5,000,000
4,370,298
4,272,690
2,750,000
1,885,857
1,585,285
1,133,942
983,572
900,000
756,514

348,566,793

29.57
16.63
11.38
8.87
7.29
4.97
3.74
2.24
2.18
1.82
1.36
1.19
1.17
0.75
0.51
0.43
0.31
0.27
0.25
0.21
95.14

(C)  suBstANtiAl shAReholDeRs
The names of substantial shareholders who have notified the Company in accordance with section 671B of the Corporations Act 2001 are:

Mr Paul Ramsay and Paul Ramsay Holdings Pty Limited
Network Investment Holdings Pty Ltd and Seven Group Holdings Limited
Ashblue Holdings Pty Limited and Mr Kerry Stokes
North Aston, Wroxby, ACE, ACE Group entities and Mr Kerry Stokes
Investors Mutual Limited
Illyria Nominees Pty Limited and Mr Lachlan Murdoch
Perpetual Limited

#   These substantial shareholdings relate to the same parcel of shares.

(D)  votiNg Rights
All ordinary shares (whether fully paid or not) carry one vote per share without restriction.

92

NumBeR
of shARes

109,903,654
41,701,955
41,701,955
41,701,955
35,335,503
32,480,782
27,540,342

PeRCeNtAge
of oRDiNARy
shARes

30.00%
11.38%#
11.38%#
11.38%#
9.65%
8.87%
7.52%

Designed and produced by ArmstrongQ – www.armstrongQ.com.au

www.primemedia.com.au